foreword - imageeventphotos.imageevent.com/allout/sequoia/ownerqus manual.pdf · your vehicle has...

05_SEQUOIA_U (L/O 0408)

i

2005 SEQUOIA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34424U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value–conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble–free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

� U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331

� CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll–free: 1–888–TOYOTA–8 (1–888–869–6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

2004 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.


ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


iii


Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1–3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1–3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1–3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact ofthe head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.


iv


In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag,or if an object or some part of his or her body has beenplaced between the occupant and the airbag at the time ofdeployment. This is just one example of how the instruc-tions in Section 1–3 of this Owner’s Manual will help en-sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1–3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device records someor all of the following information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification


v


� SRS airbag deployment data

� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non–Toyota organization forresearch purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyotalimited warranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that thespecified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives de-tails of these maintenance requirements. Also includedin Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.


vi


Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accesso-ries for Toyota vehicles are currently available in themarket. You should know that Toyota does not warrantthese products and is not responsible for their perfor-mance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage theymay cause to, or adverse effect they may have on,your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuineToyota products. Modification with non–genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durabili-ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. Inaddition, damage or performance problems resulting fromthe modification may not be covered under warranty.


vii


Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing Equip-ment Standard.

Installation of a mobiletwo–way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic throttle control system,cruise control system, anti–lock brake system, tractioncontrol system (two–wheel drive models)/active tractioncontrol system (four–wheel drive models), vehicle stabil-ity control system, rear height control air suspensionsystem, tire pressure warning system, SRS airbag sys-tem and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure tocheck with your Toyota dealer for precautionary mea-sures or special instructions regarding installation.


viii


Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 429 and 355.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and front seat belt pretensioner devicesin your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the ve-hicle is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners leftas they are, this may cause an accident such as fire.Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag andseat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by aqualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer beforeyou dispose of your vehicle.


ix


On–pavement and off–roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle andmaneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car be-cause it is designed for off–road use also. In addition,this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center ofgravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. Thisvehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to bemore likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of control, accidents orvehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sureto read “Off–road vehicle precautions” on page 334 inSection 2 and “Off–road driving precautions” on page365 in Section 3.

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.


x



1


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 1


2


1. Side vents

2. Instrument cluster

3. Center vents

4. Multi–information display

5. Personal lights

6. Garage door opener box or auxiliarybox

7. Electric moon roof switches

8. Side defroster outlet

9. Glove box

10. Power door lock switches

11. Power window switches

12. Power outlets

13. Seat heater switches

14. Rear console box

15. Rear air conditioning controls

16. Headphone input jacks and headphonevolume control dials

17. Input terminal adapter

18. Cup holders

19. Power rear view mirror control switches

20. Lower vent

Instrument panel overview�View A


3


21. Hood lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch


4


1. Power back window switch

2. Driving position memory switches

3. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

4. Ignition switch

5. Wiper and washer switches

6. Automatic transmission selector lever

7. Emergency flasher switch

8. Automatic transmission shift position“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)

9. Audio system or navigation systemincluding audio system (For thenavigation system, see the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

10. Air conditioning controls

11. Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light/front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light

12. Back window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch

13. Clock

14. Cup holder

15. Glass breakage sensor

16. Power outlet main switch

17. Rear height control air suspensionswitches

�View B (two–wheel drive models)


5


18. Ashtray

19. Cigarette lighter

20. Traction control off switch (“TRAC OFF” switch)

21. Cruise control switch

22. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

23. Audio remote control switches

24. Tilt steering lock release lever

25. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbagsoff switch

26. Instrument panel light control knob


6


1. Power back window switch

2. Driving position memory switches

3. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

4. Ignition switch

5. Wiper and washer switches

6. Automatic transmission selector lever

7. Emergency flasher switch

8. Automatic transmission shift position“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)

9. Audio system or navigation systemincluding audio system (For thenavigation system, see the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

10. Air conditioning controls

11. Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light/front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light

12. Back window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch

13. Clock

14. Cup holder

15. Glass breakage sensor


17. Rear height control air suspensionswitches

�View B (four–wheel drive models)


7


18. Ashtray

19. Cigarette lighter

20. Front drive control switches

21. Center differential lock switch

22. Cruise control switch

23. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

24. Audio remote control switches

25. Tilt steering lock release lever

26. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag offswitch

27. Instrument panel light control knob


8


1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Oil pressure gauge

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Height control indicator lights

10. Volt meter

Instrument cluster overview�Type A


9


1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Oil pressure gauge

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters


10. Volt meter

�Type B


10


or

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Anti–lock brake system warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturewarning light (four–wheel drive models)∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system/traction controlsystem (two–wheel drive models) or activetraction control system (four–wheel drivemodels) warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


11


Automatic transmission indicator lights

Traction control system off indicator light(two–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light(four–wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Overdrive–off indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent systemindicator light

Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags offindicator light

Headlight low beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Low speed four–wheel drive indicator light∗2

High speed four–wheel drive indicator light∗2

Center differential lock indicator light∗2

(four–wheel drive models)


12


Cruise control indicator light∗4

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 162 in Section 1–6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page177 in Section 1–7.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”on page 189 in Section 1–7.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 205 inSection 1–7.

Manual control mode indicator light∗3

Height control indicator lights


13


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back window 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 2


14


Your vehicle is supplied with the twokinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built–in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys


15


� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transporter keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.


16


KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 36 in this Section.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Engine immobilizer system


17


Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built–in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI–4ETYMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS–210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.


18


1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. Back window open switch

4. “PANIC” switch

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, open the backwindow or activate the “PANIC” modefrom a distance within approximately 1m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingbattery” on page 23.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 402 inSection 4.)

Wireless remote control—


19





NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


20



Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches slow-ly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time one beep willbe heard, and the parking lights and taillights flash once.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, locking cannot beperformed by the “LOCK” switch and abeep will sound continuously for 10 sec-onds. However, if the key is in the igni-tion, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doorsand back door securely or push the “UN-LOCK” switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

—Locking and unlockingdoors


21


To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,and the parking lights and tail lights flashtwice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a wire-less remote control transmitter, the interiorlight, luggage compartment light, ignitionswitch light and foot light come on forabout 15 seconds before fading out, evenif the door is not opened. (For details, see“Center interior and personal lights” onpage 150, “Center interior light” on page151, “Luggage compartment light” on page152 and “Ignition switch light” on page152 in Section 1–5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The wireless door locking or unlockingfunction can be erased. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

SWITCHING BEEP SOUND ON AND OFF

You can switch the beep on and off. (Thebeep is on initially and after battery re-placement.)

To switch the beep on and off:

With the driver’s door opened—

1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.

2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignitionkey again and turn it to the “ON” posi-tion.

3. After 10 seconds, push the same“LOCK”, “UNLOCK”, “PANIC” switch orback window open button twice within10 seconds.Two beep sounds inform you that theprogram has been switched on or off.

If this procedure is not followed exactly,the beep will not operate as expected.

Check the beep ON/OFF operation bypushing the transmitter switch after youfinish this procedure. If the beep does notoperate as expected, repeat this proce-dure from step 1.


22


To open the back window, push theback window open switch of the trans-mitter for about 1 second. The windowwill fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion, the back window cannot be openedby the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the masterkey, see “Power back window” on page 31in this Section.

The back window opening program bywireless remote control can be changed ordisabled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights and tail lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, push the “PANIC” or“UNLOCK” switch, or unlock any side dooror back door with key. You can also stopthe alarm by turning the ignition key from“LOCK” to the “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Opening back window —Activating panic mode


23


For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the battery by following theseprocedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery by ballpoint pen. Insert the tip ofballpoint pen at the guide groove andlift as shown in the above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

—Replacing battery


24


3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all the sidedoors and back door simultaneously.

Side doors—


25


This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously using a key,the interior light, luggage compartmentlight and ignition switch light will come onand remain on for about 15 seconds be-fore fading out. (For details, see “Centerinterior and personal lights” on page 150,“Center interior light” on page 151, “Lug-gage compartment light” on page 152 and“Ignition switch light” on page 152 in Sec-tion 1–5.)

The windows and electric moon roof canbe opened or closed with the key opera-tion in the driver’s door keyhole. (For de-tails, see “Power windows” on page 28and “Electric moon roof” on page 40 inthis Section.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Doors cannot be locked when either frontdoor is open and the key is in the igni-tion.


26


Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-ly.

When the front doors are locked from theoutside or locked with the wireless remotecontrol transmitter, the power door lockswitch will not work until either front dooris unlocked with the key, lock knob, orwireless remote control transmitter.

If the vehicle is subjected to a severeimpact from the front or rear, or fromeither side with the ignition switch at the“ON” position, all the door locks are auto-matically cancelled.

REAR DOOR CHILD–PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child–protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.


27


CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

You can set the following auto doorlocking and unlocking functions.

(a) Locking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the selector le-ver is moved out of the “P” position withthe ignition switch in the “ON” position.

This function is the default setting for newvehicles.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the selector le-ver is moved to the “P” position with theignition switch in the “ON” position.

(c) Locking linked with the vehiclespeed

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or high-er. However, if any door is unlocked dur-ing driving, this auto locking function willnot operate until the unlocked door isopened once.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening thedriver’s door

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the driver’sdoor is opened within 10 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned from “ON” tothe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Setting the functions

1. Close all the side doors and back door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position;

� To set function (a)Push and hold the front of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in the “P”position.

� To set function (b)Push and hold the rear of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in the “P”position.

� To set function (c)Push and hold the front of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in anyposition except “P”.

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions


28


� To set function (d)Push and hold the rear of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in anyposition except “P”.

All the side doors and back door automati-cally lock and unlock when you releasethe power door lock switch. This indicatesthat the function is set. If all the doors donot lock and unlock, the time the switchwas held may have been too short or toolong. Perform the procedure over againstarting from step 1.

If you want to cancel a function, repeatthe procedure. Each time you perform theprocedure, the function is set or can-celled.

Window lockswitch

Driver’s door switches

Front passenger’s door switch

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Theystop working when either front side dooris opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S AND FRONTPASSENGER’S WINDOWS

Use the switches on the driver’s doorand front passenger’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passenger’s windowcannot be operated.

Power windows


29



Front passenger’s door switch

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the front passengers’window cannot be operated.

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation, the window stops andopens half way if something gets caughtbetween the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.


30


OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The front windows can be opened andclosed with the key operation in the driv-er’s door keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully backward andhold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windowbegins to open. To stop the window part-way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully forward andhold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-gins to close. To stop the window partway,release the key.

This feature can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

Windowlockswitch


OPERATING THE REAR PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each rear passen-gers’ doors or the switches on the driv-er’s door that control rear passengers’windows.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passenger’s windowscannot be operated. Rear passengers’ door switches


31


CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the power win-dows, make sure he or she oper-ates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.


The back window can be operated withthe switch on the instrument panel.

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-tion.

Key off operation: If the both front doorsare closed, the window works for 43 sec-onds even after the ignition switch isturned off. It stops working when the ei-ther front door is opened.

To open: Push the switch on the “ ”side. The back window will fully open au-tomatically. To stop the window partway,push either side of the switch.

Power back window


32


When you quickly push and release theswitch, the back window will open whilethe switch is depressed and stop whenreleased.

To close: Push the switch on the “ ”side. The back window will fully close au-tomatically. To stop the window partway,push either side of the switch.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the back window will close whilethe switch is depressed and stop whenreleased.

You can also open the back window whenthe back window wiper is working. At thattime, the wiper stops working until thewindow is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window wiper, washer, and defoggerwill not work. (See “Back window wiperand washer” on page 154 and “Back win-dow and outside rear view mirror defog-gers” on page 154 in Section 1–5.)

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation, the window stops andopens slightly if something gets caughtbetween the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION



If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back window may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the back window.

To normalize the back window, close thewindow fully by the power back windowswitch. If the window has already beenclosed, open it slightly and then fullyclose it using the power back windowswitch.

Make sure that the back window opensand closes automatically. If the back win-dow cannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.


33



The back window can be opened andclosed with the key operation in the backdoor keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock-wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windowbegins to open. To stop the window part-way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise andhold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-gins to close. To stop the window partway,release the key.

This door key linked function can beerased. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

You can also open the back window whenthe back window wiper is working. At thetime, the wiper stops working until thewindow is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window wiper, washer, and defoggerwill not work. (See “Back window wiperand washer” on page 154 and “Back win-dow and outside rear view mirror defog-gers” on page 154 in Section 1–5.)

CAUTION


� Before you close the power backwindow, always make sure there isnobody around the power back win-dow. You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the powerback window, make sure he or sheoperates the window safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerback window switch without super-vision.



34


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power back window switchand get trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Keep the back window closed whiledriving. This not only keeps theluggage from being thrown out butalso prevents exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

Vehicles with wireless remote control sys-tem—

To open the back window with the wire-less remote control transmitter, see“—Opening back window” on page 22 inthis Section.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-neously with back door.

To open the back door, pull the lever.

The back door will be controlled by oper-ating the power door lock switch.

The back door window can be opened orclosed with the key operation in the backdoor keyhole. (For details, see “Powerback window” on page 31 in this Section.)

When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 356in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

Back door


35


CAUTION

Keep the back window and back doorclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER BACK DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the power door lock switch si-multaneously locks or unlocks the backdoor. (See “Side doors” on page 24 in thisSection.)

Vehicles with wireless remote control sys-tem—

To lock or unlock the back door, see“Wireless remote control” on page 18 inthis Section.


36


To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood make sure itlocks into place. If necessary, press downgently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-tery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected when the vehicle is locked.

On some models, the alarm alsosounds, when someone attempts tobreak the side windows.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights and tail lights.

Hood Theft deterrent system


37


Indicator light

Glass breakage sensor (on some models)

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”on page 16 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the side doors is unlocked oropened without the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter, or if the backdoor or hood is forcibly opened

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected

Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—

� The side windows are tapped or bro-ken.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and thekey is not in the ignition switch, all theside doors and back door will re–lock au-tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.


38


Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingtwo ways:

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

� Unlock any of the side doors or backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at thesame time.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light goes off orstarts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

Fuel tank cap


39


1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it an additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right, and set it in thereceptacle on the back side of the door.


40


When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear a click. Whenyou hear the click, the cap is fullyclosed.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation


To operate the moon roof, use theswitches between the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the“�” (rear) side.

The roof will open and stop partway 135mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push “�” (rear) sideagain, the moon roof will open fully. Tostop the roof partway, push the same sideor “�” (front) side while the roof is mov-ing.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway135 mm (5.3 in.) from the fully openedposition.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the“�” (front) side.

Electric moon roof


41


The roof will fully close. To stop the roofpartway, push the same side or “�” (rear)side briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the “TILT” switch on the“UP” side.To lower: Push the “TILT” switch on theopposite side of “UP”.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-sired position. The roof will move whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Key off operation: If all the doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when any of the doors is opened.

Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the moon roof andframe during closing operation, the moonroof stops and opens half way.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.


The moon roof can be opened and closedwith the key operation in the driver’s doorkeyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully backward andhold it.

After the door is unlocked, the moon roofbegins to open. To stop in the middle,return the key.

To close: Turn the key fully forward andhold it.

After the door is locked, the moon roofbegins to close. To stop in the middle,return the key.

This door key linked operation for slidingoperation can be erased or changed intothe door key linked operation for tiltingoperation. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.


42


CAUTION


� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone closes the moon roof, firstmake sure it is safe to do so.


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the moon roof switches and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.




43


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrests 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving position memory system 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front passenger occupant classification system 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 3


44


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded–down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non–slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


45


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats equippedwith side airbags. Such change mayprevent the side airbag system fromactivating correctly, disable the sys-tem or cause the side airbag sys-tem to inflate accidentally, resultingin death or serious injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat–lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions


46


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTINGLEVER

Pull up or push down the lever.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats(manual seat)


47


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHIONANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats (powerseat)


48


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch in the desireddirection.

The amount of lumber support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

Vehicles with the driving position memorysystem—The position of the driver’s seatand outside rear view mirrors can bememorized. For details, see “Driving posi-tion memory system” on page 71 in thisSection.

CAUTION

� Adjustment should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulnot to hit the seat against a pas-senger or luggage.

� Third seats only: Adjust both seatcushions to the same position andalign both seatbacks at the sameangle when a person sits in thethird seat center position. Other-wise, the person cannot wear theseat belt properly and this maycause serious injuries in a collision.

� When folding up the third seats, donot fold down or up the secondseats.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is lock in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not allow sitting on top of afolded–down seatback, or in theluggage compartment while driving.Persons not properly seated and/orproperly restrained by seat beltscan be severely injured in the eventof emergency braking or a collision.

� Do not operate any equipment inthe luggage compartment whiledriving. People not properly seatedand/or properly restrained by seatbelts can be severely injured in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

� Do not load luggage with only theseatback folded down. Do not failto swing the whole seat up in sucha case. Luggage sliding forwardduring braking may cause an acci-dent or severe injury.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions


49


� When returning seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug-gage compartment. See “—Stowage pre-cautions” on page 356 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

Bench type Separate type

—Adjusting second seat


50


SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the p assengersare sitting up straight and well backin the seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hips andapply restraint forces directly to theabdomen or your neck may contactthe shoulder belt. In the event of afrontal collision, the more the seat isreclined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

Right side

Left side

For easy access to the third seats:

Right side—

Lower the head restraint to the lowestposition. Fold down the seatback whilepulling the seatback angle adjusting leverand lift up the seat.

To return the tumbled seat:

1. After passengers are in, return the seatuntil it locks securely.

2. Lift up the seatback by pulling the le-ver.

Note: When the tumbled seat is returnedto the floor, it cannot be directly swung upto the tumbled position again. When youreturn the seat locked in the floor to thetumbled position, you must lift up theseatback once and repeat the above op-erations 1 and 2.

Left side—

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Fold down the seatback whilepulling the seatback angle adjusting leverand lift up the whole seat while pulling theseat lock release lever on the side.

To return the tumbled seat to the originalposition, reverse the above operation.

—Tumbling second seat forthird seat entry (bench type)


51


CAUTION

� Make sure people or luggage areclear of the seat. Then, hold theseat and slowly move it. Otherwise,people may be injured or luggagemay be damaged, if the seat hitsthem.

� Left side only—Use the seat lockrelease lever on the side only whenfolding up the seat.

� After returning the seat, make surethe seat is securely locked by push-ing forward and rearward on thetop of the seatback or by trying topull up the edge of the bottomcushion. Failure to do so will pre-vent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

For easy access to the third seats:

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Fold down the seatback whilepulling the seatback angle adjusting leverand lift up the whole seat while pulling theseat lock release lever on the side.


CAUTION


� Use the seat lock release lever onthe side only when folding up theseat.

� After returning the seat, make surethe seat is securely locked by push-ing forward and rearward on thetop of the seatback or by trying topull up the edge of the bottomcushion. Failure to do so will pre-vent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

—Tumbling second seat forthird seat entry (separate type)


52


BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Stow the second seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, they must be stowed beforeyou tumble the seatback.

Right side

Left side

TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Right side—

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position. Fold down the seatbackwhile pulling the seatback angle ad-justing lever and swing the wholeseat up and forward.

To return the tumbled seat:

1. Return the seat until it locks securely.

2. Lift up the seatback by pulling the le-ver.

Note: When the tumbled seat is returnedto the floor, it cannot be directly swung upto the tumbled position again. When youreturn the seat locked in the floor to thetumbled position, you must lift up theseatback once and repeat the above op-erations 1 and 2.

Left side—

1. Lower the head restraints to the low-est position. Fold down the seatbackwhile pulling the seatback angle ad-justing lever and swing the wholeseat up and forward while pu llingthe seat lock release lever on theside.


—Tumbling second seats forluggage space (bench type)


53


CAUTION


� To avoid serious injury, do not siton the folded seatback.

� Left side only—Use the seat lockrelease lever on the side only whenfolding up the seat.

2. Take the holding strap out of itshole, and hook the strap onto theassist grip. Then, pull the strap onthe free end to secure the seat.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe hole.

CAUTION

When tumbling the second seats, fixthe seats securely by adjusting thelength of the holding strap. Failure todo so may cause an unexpected acci-dent or severe injury in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

WHEN RETURNING THE SECONDSEATS

If you cannot raise the seatback be-cause of the locked seat belt, do nottry it forcibly. Release the lock of theseat belt in the following way. Push inthe lower front edge of the seatbackcushion to slacken the seat belt (1) andlet the seat belt retract a little (2).


54


CAUTION

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or s udden stop:

� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

� Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Stow the second seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE


TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

1. Lower the head restraints to the low-est position. Fold down the seatbackwhile pulling the seatback angle ad-justing lever and swing the wholeseat up and forward while pu llingthe seat lock release lever on theside.


—Tumbling second seats forluggage space (separate type)


55


CAUTION


� To avoid serious injury, do not siton the folded seatback.

� Use the seat lock release lever onthe side only when folding up theseat.

2. Take the holding strap out of itshole, and hook the strap onto theassist grip. Then, pull the strap onthe free end to secure the seat.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe hole.

CAUTION

When tumbling the second seats, fixthe seats securely by adjusting thelength of the holding strap. Failure todo so may cause an unexpected acci-dent or severe injury in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or s udden stop:


� Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.


56


From front

From rear

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

From front—

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

From rear—

Pull the lever up. Then slide the seatto the desired position and release thelever.

When a person sits in the third seatcenter position, adjust both seat cush-ions to the same position.

Do not place anything under the seats. Itmight interfere with the seat–lock mecha-nism.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

From front—

Lean forward and pull the lever towardyou. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the lever.

From rear—

Push down the lever. Push the seatbackforward or pull it backward to the de-sired angle and release the lever.

When a person sits in the third seatcenter position, align both seatbacks atthe same angle.

Remove the center head restraint whenadjusting the seat position or seatbackangle.

Store the center head restraint in the aux-iliary box on the rear left side panel whenit is not in use. (For details, see “Headrestraints” on page 66 in this Section.)

—Adjusting third seats


57


CAUTION

� Adjust both seat cushions to thesame position and align both seat-backs at the same angle when aperson sits in the third seat centerposition. Otherwise, the person can-not wear the seat belt properly andthis may cause serious injuries ina collision.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or per-sonal injury.

BEFORE FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE


2. Make sure the shoulder belt passesthrough the hanger when folding thethird seats.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

—Tumbling third seats forluggage space


58


3. To stow the center seat belt, pull itslightly out of its cover. It will auto-matically roll back partway. Roll theseat belt backwards as shown aboveand insert it into the slot of its cov-er. Make sure the tabs are securelylocked in the cover.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

CAUTION

When tumbling the third seats, do notfold down or up the second seats.

TUMBLING THIRD SEATS

1. Remove the center head restraint.


59


The removed head restraint can bestored in the auxiliary box on the rearleft side panel. For details, see “Headrestraints” on page 66 in this Section.

Store the head restraint in the auxiliarybox when it is not in use.

2. Lower the outside head restraint tothe lowest position.


60


From front

From rear

3. Move the seat to the rear–most posi-tion. Unlock the seatback and fold itdown.

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury, do not sit onthe folded seatback.

4. Unlock the seat leg by pulling thelock release lever on the rear of theseat cushion and swing the wholeseat up and forward.



61


CAUTION

� Make sure people or luggage areclear from the seat. Then, hold theseat and slowly move it. Otherwise,people may be injured or luggagemay be damaged, if the seat hitsthem.

� When tumbling the seat, be carefulnot to get your hands or feetpinched in the seat.

5. Take the holding strap out of itshole which is on the rear of the sec-ond seat (For the location of thestrap, see “—Tumbling second seatsfor luggage space (bench type)” onpage 52 or “—Tumbling second seatsfor luggage space (separate type)”on page 54 in this Section.), andhook the strap into the hollow onthe underside of the seat cushion.Next, pull the strap on the free endto secure the seat.

When returning the third seats to its origi-nal position, put the holding strap into thehole.

CAUTION

� When tumbling the third seats, fixthe seats securely by adjusting thelength of the holding strap. Failureto do so may cause an unexpectedaccident or severe injury in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

� When returning seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.


62


BEFORE REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE


2. When removing the third seats, passthe third seat belts through thehangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belts is inuse.

3. To stow the center seat belt, pull itslightly out of its cover. It will auto-matically roll back partway. Roll theseat belt backwards as shown aboveand insert it into the slot of its cov-er. Make sure the tabs are securelylocked in the cover.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

—Removing third seats


63


REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Remove the center head restraint.




64


2. Lower the outside head restraint tothe lowest position.

From front

From rear

3. Move the seat to the rear–most posi-tion. Unlock the seatback and fold itdown.

CAUTION

Make sure people or luggage areclear from the seat. Then, hold theseat and slowly move it. Otherwise,people may be injured or luggagemay be damaged, if the seat hitsthem.


65


4. Pull the center handle (2) up whileholding up the left side lever (1) un-der the seat, lift the seat and removeit toward you.

Removing the third seats will enlarge theluggage compartment. See “—Stowageprecautions” on page 356 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

To reinstall the third seats, do this;

1. Hook the front legs to the front an-chors.

2. Lock the rear legs on the rear an-chors.

The direction marked “L” or “R”, whichshows the location, is on the rear ofeach seat cushion, so install each seataccording to the mark.

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling theseat, observe the following to preventpersonal injury:

� Do not fold or remove the seatwhile the vehicle is moving.


� Be careful not to hit the removedseat against a person or drop it onyourself.

� After folding or installing the seat,push it forward and backward tomake sure it is locked in position.

To prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop:

� Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback while driving.

� Do not leave the removed seatloose in the vehicle.

� Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed seat.

� When reinstalling the seat, be care-ful not to hit the seat against youor inside of the vehicle.


66


� When reinstalling the seat, makesure the seat is securely locked bypushing forward and rearward onthe top of the seatback or by tryingto pull up the edge of the bottomcushion. Failure to do so will pre-vent the seat belt from operatingproperly.

� Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent thirdseat occupants from using seatbelts properly.

� Do not reinstall the seat with itsback facing forward.

� Make sure the seat is securelylocked in the proper position.

NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-moved seat. The metallic tips of theseat leg may be damaged and theseat cannot be reinstalled.

If the seat legs are locked in the wrongposition, pull up the left side lever un-der the seat. Then lift and remove theseat.

Front

Second (bench type)

Head restraints


67


Second (separate type)

Third (outside)

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Center head restraint of the bench typesecond seats—When an occupant sits onthe center position of the second seats,always pull up the center head restraint ofthe second seats to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closet to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Center head restraint of the thirdseat—The removed head restraint canbe stored in the auxiliary box on therear left side panel.


To store the head restraint:

1. Remove the head restraint.


68


2. Remove the auxiliary box lid on therear left side panel.

3. Store the head restraint, with its legsin the hole, in the auxiliary box.

4. Attach the straps.

Make sure the head restraint is securelyheld in place.


69


To release the straps, push on both sidesof the buckle and pull apart.

Front

Second (bench type)

To use the armrest, do this.

Front—Pull the armrest down as shown inthe illustration.

Second (bench type)—Pull the armrest outas shown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Armrests


70


To turn on the seat heater, push theswitches (“L” switch for the driver’sseat and “R” switch for the front pas-senger’s seat).

At this time, the indicator light will illumi-nate to indicate the seat heater is operat-ing.

The seat heater switches have the follow-ing positions.

“HI”—High heating temperature“LO”—Low heating temperature

The key must be in the “ON” position tooperate seat heaters.

Pushing lightly on the opposite side willturn it off.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

� Persons who have delicate skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Person who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, donot use the seat heater with a blan-ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarge, turn the switch off whenthe engine is not running.

Seat heaters


71


This system can memorize the positionof the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors, and recall them at thetouch of a button.

Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize twoseparate positions.

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The key must be in the “ON” position andthe shift lever is in the “P” position.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outsiderear view mirrors to the desiredposition.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,push button “1” or “2” until a beepis heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi-tions by repeating the above steps. If step2 is performed when both buttons “1” and“2” are memorized, the previous positionwill be erased and a new position will beset.

To make only slight changes to an alreadymemorized position, the easiest way is tofirst activate the memorized position, thenmake the desired changes and performstep 2 above.

Driving position memorysystem


72


RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, abeep will sound and the driving posi-tion will be automatically adjusted tothe position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalledunder the following conditions:

� The ignition key is in the “ON positionand the shift lever is in the “P” posi-tion.

� The key is not in the ignition switchand less than 30 seconds have passedsince opening the driver’s door.

To stop the operation, push any drivingposition memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button“1” or “2” again.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the memory will be erased and the posi-tions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

� Do not start the vehicle while theadjustment are being made.

� Take care not to select the wrongbutton, or the seat could strike therear passenger or hit your bodyagainst the steering wheel. If thishappens, you can stop the move-ment by pressing another drivingposition memory switch, or de-pressing the brake pedal.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 107 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Seat belts— —Seat belt precautions


73


Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal co llision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belt—they may se-verely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 407in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.


74


Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 107 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Take upslack

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


75


CAUTION

� Both high–positioned lap belts andloose–fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended event. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.


76


To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

CENTER SEAT BELT OF THE THIRDSEATS

The center seat belt of the third seats isa 3–point type restraint with 2 buckles.Both seat belt buckles must be correctlylocated and securely latched for properoperation.

Make sure buckle 1 (with light graybuckle–release button) is securely latchedfor ready use of the center seat belt.

Two buckles and tabs for rear centerseat belt

The two buckles for the rear center seatbelt of the third seats are distinguishedwith colors of the buckle release button.Also the two tabs have different shape forits end so that the belt is not buckled inthe wrong place.

Buckle 1 (with light gray buckle–re-lease button)—Properly matches withconcave end tabBuckle 2 (with red buckle–release but-ton)—Properly matches with round endtab


77


CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-rectly located and securely latched.Failure to properly match the buckleand tab may cause severe injury incase of an accident or a co llision.

To release the concave end tab, insert thekey into the hole on buckle 1 (with lightgray buckle–release button) and allow thebelt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the center seat belt of thethird seats with either buckle re-leased. Fastening only the shoulderbelt or lap belt may cause severe per-sonal injury in case of sudden brak-ing or a collision.


78


Second (bench type)

second (separate type)

Third

The seat belt buckles of the secondand third seats can be stowed whennot in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed beforeyou fold the seat back. (See “—Tumblingsecond seats for luggage space (benchtype)” on page 52, “—Tumbling secondseats for luggage space (separate type)”on page 54, “—Tumbling third seats forluggage space” on page 57 and “—Re-moving third seats” on page 62 in thisSection.)

STOWING THE CENTER SEAT BELT OFTHE THIRD SEATS

To stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the seat belt out of its cov-er. It will automatically roll back part-way. Roll the seat belt backward andinsert it into the slot of its cover asshown above. Make sure the tabs aresecurely locked in the cover.

Seat belt must be stowed before you foldthe seatback. (See “—Tumbling third seatsfor luggage space” on page 57 or “—Re-moving third seats” on page 62 in thisSection.)

—Stowing seat belt buckles ofthe second and third seats

—Stowing the center seat beltof the third seats


79


NOTICE

Stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats when not in use.

PULLING OUT THE CENTER SEAT BELTOF THE THIRD SEATS

To use the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the belt out a little and thenpull the tabs out from the cover.

The center shoulder belt comfort guidefor the third seat center position willprovide added seat belt comfort forchildren who have outgrown child re-straints and for small adults. When thecenter shoulder belt is inserted throughthe guide, the comfort guide pulls thebelt away from the neck and head of anoccupant.

To use the comfort guide, do as fol-lows.

—Seat belt comfort guide


80


INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE

1. Pull the comfort guide out of thepocket on the rear of the seatbackof the third left seat.

2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulderseat belt for the third seat centerposition with your fingers and slidethe belt past the slot of the guide asshown above. At this time, the elas-tic cord must be behind the seatbelt.

CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twisted andthat it lies flat. The elastic cord mustbe behind the belt and the guidemust be on the front.

3. Buckle, position and release the seatbelt. (For wearing the seat belt, see“—Fastening front and rear seatbelts” on page 74 in this Section.)Make sure the shoulder belt crossesthe shoulder.


81


REMOVING AND STORING THECOMFORT GUIDE

Pinch the two edges of the seat belttogether so that you can slide them outof the guide. Pull the guide upward andslide the guide with the elastic cordinto the pocket on the rear of the seat-back of the third left seat as shownabove.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, remove and store thecomfort guide in its pocket when it isnot in use.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer toorder the proper required length for theextender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-pect to wear for proper measurement andselection of length. Additional ordering in-formation is available at your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofpersonal injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

—Seat belt extender


82


� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.


83


To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

—Seat belt pretensioners


84


The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 102 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-ate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCAOFF” indicator light is on. For details, see“Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags offswitch” on page 106 in this Section.

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light

3. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

6. Airbag sensor assembly

7. SRS warning light


85


The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non–toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two–way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.


86


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicatorlight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 162 in Section 1–6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds.

� The light comes on while driving.

� If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunctionor activation of the relevant seat beltpretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help re-duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or frontpassenger’s head or chest caused by hit-ting the vehicle interior.

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag


87


The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 102 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 72 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 107 in thisSection.


88


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the side

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.


89


The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)



6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

7. Driver’s seat position sensor


9. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)


The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon–toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non–toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.


90


CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page44 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 107 in this Sec-tion.


91


� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden activationof the system or disable the sys-tem, which could result in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS frontairbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.


� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel, dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag or front passen-ger’s seat


92


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.


If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.7



The SRS warning light will come on andfront passenger occupant classification in-dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there isa malfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.


93


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and second seat outside passen-gers in addition to the primary safetyprotection provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or second seat outside passen-ger’s head.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled up,regardless of the presence of an occupantin the seat. (As for the front passengeroccupant classification system, see “Frontpassenger occupant classification system”on page 102 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or rear outsideseat.

Roll sensing function:In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-tain shield airbags on both sides workwith the seat belts to help reduce injuryby inflating. The curtain shield airbagshelp reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,front passenger’s or second seat outsidepassenger’s head and help prevent themfrom being thrown out of the vehicle. (Thisfunction can be turned off if inflation isnot desired. See “Roll sensing of curtainshield airbags off switch” on page 106 inthis Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


94


Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and second seat outsidepassengers seat belt systems. Toensure maximum protection in anaccident, the driver and all passen-gers in the vehicle must wear theirseat belts properly. Wearing a seatbelt properly during an accident re-duces the chances of death or seri-ous injury or being thrown out ofthe vehicle. For instructions andprecautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” onpage 72 in this Section.

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front and rear p illars or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page107 in this Section.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.

The curtain shield airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.


95


Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a front or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed side collision.

The angle ofvehicle tip–upis marginal

Skidding vehiclehitting a curbstone

The SRS curtain shield airbags may in-flate if the angle of vehicle tip–up ismarginal or if the skidding vehicle’stires hit a curb stone laterally as shownin the illustration.

Collision fromthe front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The SRS curtain shield airbags are notgenerally designed to inflate if the ve-hicle is involved in a front or rear colli-sion, if it pitches end over end, or ifit is involved in a low–speed side colli-sion.


96


Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbagsmay deploy if a serious impact occursto the underside of your vehicle. Someexamples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors



The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non–toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensorassembly triggers the curtain shield airbaginflator. At this time, a chemical reactionin the inflators quickly fills the airbagswith non–toxic gas to help restrain thelateral motion of the occupants.


97


When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non–toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of theseat belts may not retain you insidethe vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.


98


� Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indica-tor light is off. The curtain shieldairbags will not inflate in a vehiclerollover if this indicator light is onand you may be killed or seriouslyinjured. For details, see “Roll sens-ing of curtain shield airbags offswitch” on page 106 in this Section.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.


99


� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.


100


� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderails containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

� Do not modify or change the sus-pension system. Such changes maycause the curtain shield airbags toinflate accidentally, which could re-sult in death or serious injury.

� Do not use tires or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size. Such a use may causethe curtain shield airbags to inflateaccidentally, which could result indeath or serious injury. For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 432 in Section 7–2.

� Do not place luggage heavier thanspecified on the roof luggage carri-er. Such luggage may cause thecurtain shield airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, which could result indeath or serious injury. For details,see “Roof luggage carrier” on page330 in Section 1–10.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS sideairbags and curtain shield airbags op-eration.


101


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.


� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.


If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.



The SRS warning light will come on andfront passenger occupant classification in-dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there isa malfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


102



� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnish (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 104 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates front passenger airbags. The sys-tem monitors the weight and load onthe front passenger seat, and the seatbelt buckle switch to determine condi-tions 1—4. In order for the system todetect the conditions correctly, do notdo any of the following.

� Put a heavy load on the front passen-ger seat.

� Attach a seatback table to the frontpassenger seatback.

� Put weight on the front passenger byputting your hands or feet on the frontpassenger seatback from the rear pas-senger seat.

Front passenger occupantclassification system


103


The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light indicates the ac-tuation of the front passenger airbag,side airbag on the front passenger seatand front passenger’s seat belt preten-sioner.

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”when the ignition switch is in the “ON”position with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, oneof the following is likely to have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-minated when an adult is seated in thefront passenger seat. If the “OFF” indica-tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to situp straight, well back in the seat, andwith the seat belt worn correctly. If the“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,either ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate “ON”and “OFF” when the ignition key isturned to the “ON” position. Afterabout four seconds, it will go off. Afterthat, the front passenger occupant clas-sification system operates and judgeswhether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

The SRS warning light will come onand front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate“OFF” if there is a malfunction in thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem.


104


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected bythe front passenger

occupant classificationsystem

Frontpassengeroccupant

classificationindicator light

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Notilluminated

Off Off DeactivatedActivated

Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward–facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 107 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)∗4:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.


105


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Do not recline the front passengerseatback so far that it touches arear seat. This may cause the“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,which indicates that the passen-ger’s airbags will not deploy in theevent of a severe accident. If theseatback touches the rear seat, re-turn the seatback to a positionwhere it does not touches the rearseat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� If an adult sits in the front passen-ger seat, the occupant classificationindicator light should indicate “ON”.If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit upstraight, well back in the seat, feeton the floor, and with the seat beltworn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-tor still remains illuminated, eitherask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible,move the front passenger seat fullyrearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not put a heavy load in thefront passenger seatback pocket orattach a seatback table to the frontpassenger seat seatback.

� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.


106


� When it is unavoidable to install theforward–facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 110 in this Section.)

� Do not remove the seat.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The front passenger occupant classifica-tion indicator light may indicate “ON” (thefront passenger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat may deploy)even if observing the above cautions,when a child sits in, or a forward–facingchild restraint system is installed on thefront passenger seat. Refer to all the cau-tions in “SRS driver airbag and front pas-senger airbag” on page 86 and “Child re-straint” on page 107 in this Section.

The roll sensing of curtain shield air-bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)can turn off the curtain shield airbagsand seat belt pretensioners in a vehiclerollover. This switch should only beused if inflation is not desired (such asextreme off–road driving).

When you push the “RSCA OFF” switchfor a few seconds with the ignition switchon, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comeson and the roll sensing function is turnedoff. When you push the switch again, theindicator light goes off and the roll sens-ing function is turned on. (For detailsabout the roll sensing function, see “SRSside airbags and curtain shield airbags” onpage 93 in this Section.)

In a severe side impact, the curtain shieldairbags on impacted side will inflate evenif the roll sensing function is turned off.(For details about the curtain shield air-bags, see “SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags” on page 93 in this Sec-tion.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat beltpretensioners will work even if the rollsensing function is turned off. (For detailsabout the seat belt pretensioners, see“—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 83 inthis Section.)

If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” with the roll sensing function offand then the ignition switch is turned backto “ON”, the roll sensing function will turnback on automatically.

Roll sensing of curtain shieldairbags off switch


107


CAUTION

� Before normal driving, make surethe “RSCA OFF” indicator light isoff.

� When the roll sensing function isturned off (and the “RSCA OFF”indicator light is on), the curtainshield airbags and seat belt preten-sioners will not work in a vehiclerollover. Turning off the curtainshield airbags and seat belt preten-sioners reduces occupant protectionwhich your vehicle safety systemscan provide in accidents and in-crease the likelihood of death orserious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 72 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear–facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the front passengeroccupant classification indicatorlight indicates “OFF”. In the eventof an accident, the impact of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the child if the rear–facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


108


� A forward–facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the front pas-senger occupant classification indi-cator light indicates “OFF”, becausethe front passenger airbag could in-flate with considerable speed andforce. Otherwise, the child may bekilled or seriously injured.

� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system


109


Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 121 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 128 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

—Types of child restraintsystem


110


(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear–facing position only.

CAUTION


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s), may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

—Installation with seat belt


111


Same angle Same position

� When installing a child restraintsystem in the third seat centerposition, adjust both seat cushionsto the same position and align bothseatbacks at the same angle. Other-wise, the child restraint system can-not be securely restrained and thismay cause death or serious injuriesin a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.


112


2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.


113


4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward–facing or rear–facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward–facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.


114


CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The occupant classification indicator lightshould indicate “OFF” when the ignitionkey is in the “ON” position and the childis in the child restraint system after fol-lowing these procedures. The “OFF” indi-cator indicates the SRS front passengerairbag and side airbag on the passengerside will not deploy. If the indicator lightindicates “ON”, remove the child restraintsystem and reinstall it with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Ifthe indicator light still indicates “ON” whenthe ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, then the SRS front passenger airbagand side airbag on the passenger sidemay deploy in an accident. Do not drivethe vehicle in this condition. Remove thechild restraint system and contact yourToyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear–facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward–facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward–facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy.


115



Move seat fully back




116


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

Same angle

Same position


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.


117


CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.


118


CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward–facing position only.


119


Move seat fully back

CAUTION



Same angle

Same position



120


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 72 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high–positioned lap belts andloose–fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.





121


2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle release button andallow the belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Use one anchor bracket on the rear ofsecond seats and two anchor brackets onthe floor as shown above to attach the topstrap.

Anchor bracket is installed for each sec-ond seating position.

—Using a top strap (for bench type second seats)


122


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKETS:


Outside position

Center position

2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 107 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.


123


3. Replace the head restraint. Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets on the floor asshown above to attach the top strap.

Anchor bracket is installed for each sec-ond seat.

—Using a top strap (for separate type secondseats)


124


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKETS:





CAUTION


3. Replace the head restraint.


125


Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol mark

Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe third seats to attach the top strap.

Anchor bracket is installed for right sideand center seating positions.

This symbol indicates the locations ofuser ready anchor bracket.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET (rightside):


—Using a top strap (for third seats)


126





CAUTION


3. Replace the head restraint. TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET(center):



127






For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 107 in this section.


128


CAUTION

� Do not replace the head restraintwhen the child restraint system isinstalled. The head restraint may in-terfere with the top strap and thechild restraint system can not besecurely restrained. This may causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

� Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the childrestraint system is secure by push-ing and pulling it in different direc-tions. Follow all the installation in-structions provided by its manufac-turer.

Center

Left

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the center and left positionsof the second seats.

The anchorages are installed in the seatcushion for center and left positions ofsecond seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages (forbench type second seats)


129


Most uprightposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back tothe most upright position until itlocks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-ly.

Canada only

Covers

Cap

Type A

Canada only

Covers

Cap

Type B


130


2. Left side: Turn up the cover for thelower anchorages. Confirm the posi-tion of the lower anchorages belowthe button on the cover.

Center: Turn up the cover for the leftlower anchorage and remove the capfor the right lower anchorage. Con-firm the position of the lower an-chorages below the button on thecover.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada— The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for bench type second seats)”on page 121 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never recline the seat.

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second seat if it inter-feres with the lock mechanism ofthe front seats. Otherwise, the childor front seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the second seat.

The anchorages are installed in the seatcushion of each second seat.


—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages (forseparate type second seats)


131






Canada only

Covers

Type A

Canada only

Covers

Type B


132


2. Turn up the covers for the lower an-chorages. Confirm the position ofthe lower anchorages below the but-ton on the cover.




If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for separate type secondseats)” on page 123 in this section.)


CAUTION



� After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second seat if it inter-feres with the lock mechanism ofthe front seats. Otherwise, the childor front seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the right side position ofthe third seats.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back for right side position of the thirdseats.


—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages(for third seats)


133






Canada only

Covers

Type A

Canada only

Cover

Type B


134


2. Turn up the cover for lower anchor-ages of the right side position. Con-firm the position of the lower an-chorages below the button on thecover.




If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for third seats)” on page 125in this Section.)


CAUTION



� When using lower anchorages for achild restraint system on the thirdseats, ensure that the seat ismoved to the rear–most position,with the seatback close to the childrestraint system.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the third seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of the sec-ond seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.


135


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti–glare inside rear view mirror 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti–glare inside rear view mirror 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 4


136


To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, pull the lockrelease lever toward you, tilt the steer-ing wheel to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can seethe side of your vehicle in the mirror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

On some models, when you push theback window defogger switch, the heaterpanels in the outside rear view mirrors willquickly clear the surface. To turn on theback window defogger, see “Back windowand outside rear view mirror defoggers” onpage 154 in Section 1–5.

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—


137


CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or injuries.

� On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch ison.

Type A

Type B

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with the driving position memorysystem—The position of the outside rearview mirrors and driver’s seat can bememorized. For details, see “Driving posi-tion memory system” on page 71 in Sec-tion 1–3.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de–icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


138


FOLDING MIRRORS (type A only)

To fold mirrors for parking in restrictedareas, push the mirror folding button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

Position 1—To fold the mirrorsPosition 2—To return the mirrors back totheir original positions

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury and any mir-ror malfunction, do not touch the mir-ror while it is moving.

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

Vehicles with power mirror folding buttononly—

If the key is turned from “LOCK” to “ACC”the mirror will move automatically accord-ing to the position of the mirror foldingbutton.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

—Folding rear view mirrors


139


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti–glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

Anti–glare inside rear viewmirror

Auto anti–glare inside rearview mirror


140


In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pressthe switch on the “OFF” side.

To turn on the automatic function again,press the switch on the “AUTO” side.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the outside air temperature is low,it may take a little longer for the mirrorto darken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious personalinjuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti–glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,extend the plate at the end of the visor(to position 3).

Sun visors—


141


To block the glare from the front when themain sun visor is swung to the lateralside (position 2), swing down the sub vi-sor.

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end ofthe sun visor when the visor is in theposition 1. It can cover the anti–glareinside rear view mirror and obstructthe rear view.

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

On some models, the vanity light comeson when you open the cover.

—Vanity mirrors


142



143


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center interior and personal lights 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center interior light 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window wiper and washer 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 154. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 5


144


HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Some models for Canada—The tail lightindicator (green light) on the instrumentpanel will tell you that the tail lights areon.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Some models for the U.S.A.—The head-light low beam indicator light (green light)on the instrument panel will tell you thatthe low beams are on.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)


145


The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the le-ver at position 2.

The lights also automatically turn off whenthe driver’s door is opened with the leverat position 1.

If the doors are locked by the wirelessremote control transmitter, the lights auto-matically turn off immediately.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system (all mod-els sold in Canada and some modelssold in the U.S.A.)

The headlights turn on when the parkingbrake is released with the engine started,even with the light switch in the “OFF”position. They will not go off until theignition switch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Under the daytime running light system,the headlights turn on at reduced intensity.Twist the knob to position 2 to turn to fullintensity for driving at night.

High–Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.


146


TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the le-ver at position 2.

The lights also automatically turn off whenthe driver’s door is opened with the leverat position 1.

If the doors are locked by the wirelessremote control transmitter, the lights auto-matically turn off immediately.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

The timing for the headlights turning offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)


147


Daytime running light system (all mod-els sold in Canada and some modelssold in the U.S.A.)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn to fullintensity for driving at night. High–Low beams— For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.


148


To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control


149


To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch. To turn the light off, push theswitch once again.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

When the center interior light switch is inthe “DOOR” position and any of the sidedoors is opened, the personal light willcome on. After all the side doors areclosed, the light remains on for a certaintime before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes out immediately:

� All the side doors are closed when theignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

� The ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,“ON” or “START” position after all theside doors are closed.

� All the doors are locked when the lightis still on.

When all the doors are unlocked usingeither the key or the wireless remote con-trol transmitter simultaneously, the lightcome on for about 15 seconds before fad-ing out.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the door key or wireless re-mote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the timing for the light turn-ing off

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the center interior light switchin “DOOR” position for 20 minutes ormore.

For details about center interior light, see“Center interior and personal lights” onpage 150 or “Center interior light” on page151 in this Section.

Front fog lights Personal lights


150


Without electric moon roof

With electric moon roof

CENTER INTERIOR LIGHT

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors is opened. The light re-mains on when all the side doors areclosed.


When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-tion and any of the side doors is opened,the light will come on. After all the sidedoors are closed, the light remains on fora certain time before fading out.




� All the doors are locked when the lightis still on.





To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch in “DOOR” positionfor 20 minutes or more.

CENTER PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the center personal light,push the switch. To turn the light off,push the switch once again.

Center interior and personallights


151


The interior lights operate separatelywith each outer switch.

To turn on the light, push the switch.To turn the light off, push the switchonce again.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors is opened. The light re-mains on when all the side doors areclosed.

“OFF”—The lights are off unless you oper-ate either outside switch.


When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-tion and any of the side doors is opened,the light will come on. After all the sidedoors are closed, the light remains on fora certain time before fading out.




� All the side doors and back door arelocked when the light is still on.





To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch in “DOOR” positionfor 20 minutes or more.

Center interior light


152


To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch hasthe following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors or back door are opened.The light goes off immediately when theback door is closed. However, the lightremains on when all the side doors areclosed.


When the switch is in “DOOR” positionand any door is opened, the light willcome on. After all the side doors areclosed, the light remains on for about 15seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightsgo off immediately.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

� The ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,“ON”, or “START” position after all theside doors are closed.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

When all the doors are unlocked usingeither the key or the wireless remote con-trol transmitter simultaneously, the lightwill come on and remain on for about 15seconds before fading out.




For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors are opened.

The light remains on for some time afterall the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the lightsgo off immediately.


� The ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,“ON”, or “START” position after all theside doors are closed.

� All the side doors are closed andlocked.

Luggage compartment light Ignition switch light


153


When all the doors are unlocked usingeither the key or the wireless remote con-trol transmitter simultaneously, the ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 20 minutes or more.




To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust thewiping time interval when the wiper leveris in the intermittent position (position 1).Twist the band upward to increase thetime between sweeps, and downward todecrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 444 inSection 7–3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Windshield wipers and washer


154


To turn on the back window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4).

The wiper is activated after the washersquirts fluid if you twist the knob upward.But, the washer only squirts fluid if youtwist the knob downward.

The knob automatically returns from thesepositions after you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 444 inSection 7–3.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window wiper and washer will notwork. Make sure the back window is fullyclosed when using the back window wiperand washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip-er if the back window is dry. It mayscratch the glass.

To defog or defrost the back window,push the switch with the back windowclosed.


The thin heater wires on the inside of theback window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will also quicklyclear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defoggers have operated about 15minutes.

Back window wiper andwasher

Back window and outside rearview mirror defoggers


155


Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving thedefoggers on for a long time could causethe battery to discharge, especially duringstop–and–go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the backwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window defogger will not work. Makesure the back window is fully closed whenusing the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while thedefogger is working, the defogger will au-tomatically turn off. Even if the back win-dow is fully closed after that, the defoggerwill not automatically turn on.


156



157


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil pressure gauge 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 6


158


The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


159


� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop–and–go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 386 inSection 4.

Normaldriving

Idling

The oil pressure gauge indicates engineoil pressure when the ignition switch ison. Check it while driving to make surethat the needle is in the proper range.

If the oil pressure should stay below thenormal range, pull off the road to a safeplace and stop the engine immediately.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop for assistance.

Oil pressure may not build up when theoil level is too low. The oil pressuregauge is not designed to indicate oil level,and the oil level must be checked usingthe level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the oilpressure below the normal range untilthe cause is fixed—it may ruin theengine.

Oil pressure gauge


160


The voltmeter tells whether the batteryis charged or discharged. Check itwhile the engine is running—the needleshould always indicate as shown above.

If the needle reads below or above thenormal range while the engine is running,it indicates the charging system needs im-mediate repair.

However, it is normal for the needle todrop below the normal range during en-gine starting.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over–revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

Voltmeter Tachometer Odometer and two trip meters


161


To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.


162


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers


163



(g) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If the brake system warning light is also on, stopimmediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all doors.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Stop and check.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks, contact Toyotadealer.

(m) Add washer fluid.


164



(n) Replace engine oil.

(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.


165


(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer come on if the driver’s seat beltis not fastened. Unless the driver fastensthe belt, the light continues flashing andthe buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se-conds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light

The light acts as a reminder to have thefront passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash.


166


(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio, etc., and drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance(I/M) programs

We recommend you to contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On–Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for a state emissioninspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 416in Section 6.


167


(f) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(g) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system (two–wheel drive vehicles), the active tractioncontrol system (four–wheel drive vehicles)and the vehicle stability control system donot operate, but the brake system stilloperates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

(h) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem and traction control system (two–wheel drive models) or active traction con-trol system (four–wheel drive models).

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off aftera few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.


168


In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the system of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensioner areoperating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicatorlight, interconnecting wiring and powersources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.



(k) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem-perature Warning Light (four–wheeldrive models)

This light warns that the automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stopthe vehicle at a safe place and put theselector lever in “P”. With the engine id-ling, wait until the light goes off. If thelight goes off, you may start the vehicleagain. If the light does not go off, call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warninglight on may damage the automatictransmission.


169


(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure ofone or more of your tires (including thespare tire) is low. The light comes onwhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-onds. This indicates that the tire pressurewarning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop yourvehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-sible and check that the inflation pressureof all tires (including the spare tire) is asspecified on the tire and loading informa-tion label. (See “Checking tire inflationpressure” on page 429 in Section 7–2.)The light should go off a few minutes afterthe tire pressure is adjusted.

If the warning light blinks, the tire pres-sure warning system may be malfunction-ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 198 in Section 1–7.

(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

This light warns that the windshield wash-er fluid level is too low. Add washer fluidat your earliest opportunity. (For instruc-tions, see “Adding washer fluid” on page444 in Section 7–3.)

(n) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutreplacing the engine oil, and if the dis-tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000miles), the light will come on after theignition key is turned to “ON” position.The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 160 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.


170


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or backdoor.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” and “VSC TRAC”warning lights, low tire pressure warn-ing light and engine oil replacementreminder light go off after a few sec-onds. The SRS warning light goes offafter about 6 seconds. (The “TRACOFF” (two–wheel drive models) or“VSC OFF” (four–wheel drive models),“RSCA OFF” indicator lights, heightcontrol indicator light, manual controlmode indicator light and slip indicatorlight also come on and go off after afew seconds.)

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.


171


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch with steering lock 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four–wheel drive system 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear height control air suspension 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 7


172


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 361 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction if the needle on allmeters and gauges move slightly when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 16in Section 1–2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engineis turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom underneath the luggage compartmentfor several minutes. This is normal opera-tion and does not indicate a malfunction.(See “Leak detection pump” on page ix.)

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock


173


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” or “ACC” position andthe selector lever pulled toward you).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is displayed on the in-strument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

(b) Shift position “L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)

To downshift to first gear (“L” position),push this switch with the shift lever in the“2” position. The “ L” is displayed on theinstrument cluster and engine braking willbe maximized.

To shift up to the “2” position, push thisswitch again.

To shift up to a position other than “2”,move the selector lever to that position.

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while pulling the selector levertoward you. (The ignition switchmust be in “ON” or “ACC” position.)

Shift while pulling the selector lever toward you.

Shift normally.

Selector lever

Overdrive switch

Shift position“L” switch

Push the shift position “L” switch.To shift from the “L” position to aposition other than “2”, move theselector lever to that position.


174


(c) Overdrive switch

You can select either fourth gear (withoverdrive off) or fifth gear (with overdriveon) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill be on automatically.

When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift the transmission bypushing and releasing the overdriveswitch, engine braking will not be enabledbecause the cruise control is not can-celled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 205 in thisSection.

(d) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 362 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

When the front drive control is in “4LO”mode (low speed, four–wheel drive), thedriving pattern selector setting has no ef-fect on gear shift timing. (See “Four–wheeldrive system” on page 177 in this Sectionfor information on the front drive control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

If the engine coolant temperature is lowor when the front drive control is in “4LO”mode (low speed, four–wheel drive), thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.(See “Four–wheel drive system” on page177 in this Section for information of thefront drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked toshift lever position is set, all doors areautomatically locked when the shift leveris moved out of “P” position after theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion and all the doors are closed. Fordetails, see “—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions” on page 27 in Section1–2.


175


(e) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to fourthgear.

� Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two–wheel drive models121 km/h (75 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

“2WD” or “4HI” mode121 km/h (75 mph)

“4LO” mode 47 km/h (29 mph)

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.





� Push the “SHIFT L” switch. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.





When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift the transmission bypushing and releasing the overdriveswitch, engine braking will not be enabledbecause the cruise control is not can-celled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 205 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.


176


(f) Using the “3”, “2” and “L”, posi-tions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or“SHIFT L” switch depressed, the vehiclecan start just as if the lever was in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to second gear.

With the “SHIFT L” switch depressed, thetransmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over–rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven above for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models“3” 135 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . “2” 90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . .


“2WD” or “4HI” mode“3” 135 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . “2” 90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . .

“4LO” mode“3” 50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . . “2” 35 km/h (21 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 20 km/h (12 mph). . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “D” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(g) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(h) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.


177


If the automatic unlocking operation linkedto shift lever position is set, all doors areautomatically unlocked when the selectorlever is moved to “P” position after theignition switch is turned to “ON” position.For details, see “—Automatic door lockingand unlocking functions” on page 27 inSection 1–2.

(i) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between fourth gear andoverdrive when climbing a gentle slope,the overdrive should be turned off. Besure to turn the switch on immediatelyafterward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

Front drive control switches

Center differential lock switch

Four–wheel drive system—(a) Front drive control


178


Use the front drive control switchesand center differential lock switch toselect the transfer and center differen-tial modes.

In the “4HI” and “4LO” mode, you canchoose to lock or unlock the center differ-ential.

Use the center differential lock system ifyour wheels get stuck in a ditch, or whenyou are driving on a slippery or bumpysurface. When the center differential islocked, the vehicle stability control systemis automatically turned off and the centerdifferential lock and “VSC OFF” indicatorlights come on because the function thatcontrols engine performance interfereswith the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lockswitch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”indicator light comes on. After thewheels are out of the ditch or off theslippery or bumpy surface, turn thecenter differential lock switch off.Make sure that the center differentiallock indicator light and “VSC OFF”indicator light turn off.

“2WD” mode (high speed, two–wheeldrive)

This mode is the normal driving mode. Inthis mode, the “4HI” and “4LO” indicatorlights are turned off.

Use this for normal driving on dry hard–surfaced roads. This position gives greatereconomy, quietest ride, least wear andbetter vehicle control.

“4HI” mode (high speed, four–wheeldrive, center differential unlocked)

To select this mode, press the “2WD/4HI”switch only. The “4HI” indicator lightcomes on.

Use this for normal driving on all types ofroads, from dry hard–surfaced roads towet, icy or snow–covered roads. Thisposition provides greater traction thantwo–wheel drive.

“4HI” mode (high speed, four–wheeldrive, center differential locked)

To select this mode, press the “2DW/4HI”switch, and then the center differentiallock switch. The “4HI” and the center dif-ferential lock indicator lights come on.

Use this for greater traction when youexperience a loss of power, such aswheel slipping, in the center differentialunlock mode.

“4LO” mode (low speed, four–wheeldrive, center differential unlocked)

To select this mode, press the “4LO”switch only. The “4LO” indicator lightcomes on.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for climbing steep hills, off–roaddriving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-curs when the wheels are negotiating asharp corner is further reduced than in the“4LO” (low speed, four–wheel drive, centerdifferential locked) mode.


179


“4LO” mode (low speed, four–wheeldrive, center differential locked)

To select this mode, press the “4LO”switch, and then press the center differen-tial lock switch. The “4LO” and the centerdifferential lock indicator lights come on.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for hard pulling in situations thevehicle cannot negotiate even in “4LO”(low speed, four–wheel drive, center differ-ential unlocked) mode. Also, using thismode when driving down steep off–roadinclines will help contribute to increasedvehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen-tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-ential is not still locked as long as theindicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, theindicator blinks. If the indicator light doesnot go off when you push out the centerdifferential lock switch, drive straightahead while accelerating or decelerating,or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-eration is not completed within 5 secondswhile the cruise control system is set,cancel the cruise control system. To can-cel the cruise control system, see “Cruisecontrol” on page 205 in Section 1–7.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. There may be a trouble in thecenter differential lock system.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in“4LO” (low speed, four–wheel drive)mode

If you press the “4LO” switch and shiftthe automatic transmission lever to “2”when you drive in steep off–road areas,the output of the brake can be controlledeffectively by the active traction controlsystem, which assists the driver to controlthe driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the “L” position of the automatictransmission for maximum power and trac-tion when your wheels get stuck or whenyou drive down a steep incline. The outputof the brake can be controlled by theactive traction control system if the enginespeed is under 3000 rpm (normally enginespeed is under 3000 rpm when the wheelsget unstuck), in the following cases:

� The front drive control in “4LO” modeand the automatic transmission in “L”or the automatic transmission in “D”,“3” or “2” with the transmission down-shifting to the first gear

� The front drive control in “4LO” modeand the automatic transmission in “R”

(As for the automatic transmission shiftpositions, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 173 in this Section.)


180


The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-gaged by the shifting operations des-cribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four–wheel drive forat least 16 km (10 miles) each month.This will assure that the front drive com-ponents are lubricated.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” MODE AND“4HI” MODE

To shift from “2WD” mode to “4HI”mode, reduce your speed to less than100 km/h (62 mph) and press the“2WD/4HI” switch.

If the “4HI” indicator light flashes whenyou press the “2WD/4HI” switch, drivestraight ahead while accelerating or decel-erating.

If the “4HI” indicator light flashes and thebuzzer sounds when you press the“2WD/4HI” switch, reduce the vehiclespeed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph)and press the switch again.

CAUTION

Never press the “2WD/4HI” switch ifwheels are slipping. Stop the slippingor spinning before shifting.

To shift from “4HI” mode to “2WD”mode, press the “2WD/4HI” switch againto turn it off.

This can be done at any vehicle speed.

If the “4HI” indicator light flashes whenyou press the “2WD/4HI” switch, drivestraight ahead while accelerating or decel-erating, or drive in reverse.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “4HI” (UNLOCKED)AND “4HI” (LOCKED)

To shift from “4HI” (UNLOCKED) to“4HI” (LOCKED), press the center differ-ential lock switch.

If the center differential lock indicator lightflashes when you press the center differ-ential lock switch, drive straight aheadwhile accelerating or decelerating.

CAUTION

Never press the center differentiallock switch if wheels are slipping.Stop the slipping or spinning beforeshifting.

(b) A.D.D. (automaticdisconnecting differential) (c) Shifting procedure


181


NOTICE

Do not drive on a dry paved surfacein “4HI” (LOCKED) mode. This maydamage the locking mechanism andthe drive system.

To shift from “4HI” (LOCKED) to “4HI”(UNLOCKED), press the center differentiallock switch again to turn off it.


If the center differential lock indicator lightflashes when you press the center differ-ential lock switch, drive straight aheadwhile accelerating or decelerating, or drivein reverse.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” OR “4HI”AND “4LO”

To shift between “2WD” or “4HI” mode and“4LO” mode, stop the vehicle and put thetransmission in “N”. With your foot holdingdown the brake pedal, press the “4LO”switch.

If the “4LO” indicator light flashes and thebuzzer sounds three times when youpress the “4LO” switch, stop the vehiclecompletely, put the transmission securelyinto “N” and press the switch again.

CAUTION

Never press the “4LO” switch ifwheels are slipping. Stop the slippingor spinning before shifting.

NOTICE

Do not drive on a dry paved surfacein “4LO” (LOCKED) mode. This maydamage the locking mechanism andthe drive system.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “4LO”(UNLOCKED) AND “4LO” (LOCKED)

To shift between “4LO” (UNLOCKED)mode and “4LO” (LOCKED) mode, pressthe center differential lock switch.


If the center differential lock indicator lightflashes when you press the center differ-ential lock switch, drive straight aheadwhile accelerating or decelerating.

CAUTION

Never press the center differentiallock switch if wheels are slipping.Stop the slipping or spinning beforeshifting.

NOTICE

Do not drive on a dry paved surfacein “4LO” (LOCKED) mode. This maydamage the locking mechanism andthe drive system.


182


The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of rearwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against rear wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the trac-tion control system is in the self–checkmode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of therear wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

Traction control system (two–wheel drive models)


183


TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in a ditchwhen you are driving on a severe offroad and sand, turn off the tractioncontrol system. This system that con-trols engine performance interferes withthe process of freeing your wheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon.

The vehicle stability control system is al-ways activated, even if the traction controlsystem is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switchonce again.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.

The traction control system will automati-cally go on, and the “TRAC OFF” indicatorlight will go off when you drive over 30km/h (19 mph) even if the “TRAC OFF”switch is pushed to cancel the tractioncontrol system.

“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on fora few seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the “TRAC OFF” switch toturn off the system.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

� The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.

The warning light will come on when theignition key is turned to “ON” and will gooff after a few seconds.


184


The brake pad or actuator temperatureincreases during continuous operation ofthe traction control system or vehicle sta-bility control system such as on slipperyroads. If the brake pad or actuator tem-perature becomes too high while the trac-tion control system or vehicle stabilitycontrol system is operating, a buzzer willstart to sound intermittently to indicatethat the traction control system can nolonger operate. In this case, stop yourvehicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, thebuzzer sound changes from intermittent tocontinuous. (The continuous buzzersounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the “VSC TRAC” warning lightwill come on and the traction control sys-tem temporarily stops operating in order toprotect the brake pad. (Although the trac-tion control system does not operate,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.) The system will be automatically re-stored after a short time and the warninglight goes out.

If the light comes on while driving, thetraction control system does not work.However, as conventional braking operateswhen applied, there is no problem to con-tinue your driving.





The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC TRAC” warning lightcomes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switchis not pushed.

The active traction control system auto-matically helps prevent the spinning of4 wheels (4WD mode) or rear wheels(2WD mode) when the vehicle is startedor accelerated on slippery road sur-faces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against 4 wheels (4WD mode)or rear wheels (2WD mode) cannot bemaintained, even though the activetraction control system is in opera-tion. Do not drive the vehicle underany speed or maneuvering conditionswhich may cause the vehicle to losetraction control. In situations wherethe road surface is covered with iceor snow, your vehicle should be fittedwith snow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

Active traction control system

(four–wheel drive models)


185


Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the ac-tive traction control system is in the self–check mode, but does not indicate a mal-function.

When the active traction control system isoperating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of the4 wheels (4WD mode) or rear wheels(2WD mode). At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.



This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the active traction controlsystem or the vehicle stability control sys-tem.



186


The brake pad or actuator temperatureincreases during continuous operation ofthe active traction control system or ve-hicle stability control system such as onslippery roads. If the brake pad or actua-tor temperature becomes too high whilethe active traction control system or ve-hicle stability control system is operating,a buzzer will start to sound intermittentlyto indicate that the active traction controlsystem can no longer operate. In thiscase, stop your vehicle immediately at asafe place.

If the system continues to operate, thebuzzer sound changes from intermittent tocontinuous. (The continuous buzzersounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the “VSC TRAC” warning lightwill come on and the active traction con-trol system temporarily stops operating inorder to protect the brake pad. (Althoughthe active traction control system does notoperate, there is no problem to continueyour driving.) The system will be automati-cally restored after a short time and thewarning light goes out.

If the light comes on while driving, theactive traction control system does notwork. However, as conventional brakingoperates when applied, there is no prob-lem to continue your driving.





The “VSC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC TRAC” warning lightcomes on even if the center differentiallock switch is not pushed.

The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti–lock brake sys-tem, traction control, engine control,etc. This system automatically controlsthe brakes and engine to help preventthe vehicle from skidding when corner-ing on a slippery road surface or oper-ating steering wheel abruptly.

This vehicle stability control activateswhen the vehicle speed is more than thefollowing speed.

Two–wheel drive models:15 km/h (9 mph)

Four–wheel drive models:“2WD” or “4HI” mode

15 km/h (9 mph)“4LO” mode 30 km/h (18 mph)

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the sys-tem is in the self–check mode but doesnot indicate a malfunction.

Vehicle stability control system


187


CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightblinks, sounding an alarm sounds,special care should be taken whiledriving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 432 in Section 7–2.)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.


Four–wheel drive models only—

Pushing the center differential lockswitch automatically turns the vehiclestability control system off. At thistime, the “VSC OFF” indicator comeson with the center differential lock indi-cator light.

“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for afew seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”.


188



� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

� The indicator light comes on when thesystem is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differentiallock indicator light goes off beforenormal driving.


This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem, traction control system (two–wheeldrive models) or active traction controlsystem (four–wheel drive models).


If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.





Two–wheel drive models—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC TRAC” warning light comes on evenif the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

Four–wheel drive models—The “VSC OFF”indicator light will come on when the “VSCTRAC” warning light comes on even if thecenter differential lock switch is notpushed.


189


1: Mode select switch2: Height select switch

This rear height control air suspensioncontrols the vehicle height dependingon vehicle driving conditions.

You can choose automatic control modeor manual control mode. In automaticcontrol mode, you can select the ve-hicle height between “HI” (high), “N”(normal) and “LO” (low) modes with theheight select switch. In manual controlmode, you can adjust the vehicle heightseamlessly with the height selectswitch.

To change the mode between automaticcontrol mode and manual control mode,use the mode select switch.

The vehicle height is automatically ad-justed to a selected height mode. Howev-er, when the front drive control is in “4LO”mode, the vehicle height cannot be ad-justed automatically even if the vehiclecondition changes, but height mode canbe changed manually with the height se-lect switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

“N” (normal) mode—

The vehicle height in this mode is stan-dard. Regardless of the number of occu-pants or the luggage loading condition, thevehicle height is always automatically ad-justed to a fixed height in this mode whilethe engine is running.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

“HI” (high) mode—

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6in.) higher at rear than “N” mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving onbumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds30 km/h (18 mph) in “HI” mode, “N” modeis automatically selected.

CAUTION

“HI” mode should be only used forsevere off–road driving conditions.Because the vehicle’s center of gravi-ty is higher in this setting, the ve-hicle may become unstable whenturning abruptly, resulting in an acci-dent.

Rear height control airsuspension— —Automatic control mode


190


“LO” (low) mode—

Two–wheel drive models—The vehicleheight is about 15 mm (0.6 in.) lower atrear than “N” mode height.

Four–wheel drive models—The vehicleheight is about 30 mm (1.2 in.) lower atrear than “N” mode height.

This mode allows for easy access to thevehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-ing and unloading.

This mode is available when the vehiclespeed is 12 km/h (7 mph) or less.

NOTICE

Use “LO” mode when the vehicle isstopped. Otherwise, when the vehiclespeed exceeds 12 km/h (7 mph), “N”mode is selected automatically. Prop-er caution should be taken in placeswhere the overhead height is limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con-dition

To change the vehicle height, it is neces-sary to meet the following conditions.

� The engine should be running.

� The manual control mode indicator lightshould go off.

� When selecting a mode, there is a ve-hicle speed limit. Refer to the followingtable.

Yes = The mode can be selected.No = The mode cannot be selected.

“LO”mode

“N”mode

“HI”mode

12 km/h (7 mph) orless

Yes Yes Yes

30 km/h (18 mph) orless

No Yes Yes

Over 30 km/h (18 mph)

No Yes No

However, when you are driving on bumpyroads, which may cause the suspension tofully elongate, the rear height control airsuspension may not operate.

If the vehicle height is adjusted on theslope, or with the selector lever in a posi-tion other than “P” or “N” while the vehicleis stopped, you may hear a sound causedby the expansion and contraction of thepropeller shaft. This does not indicate amalfunction.


191


(c) Vehicle height adjustment

To change the mode, push the heightselect switch on either side of “ �”(higher) or “ �” (lower).

The height control indicator light indicateswhich mode is selected. (See “(d) Indica-tor lights” described below.)

Selecting “HI” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “�”side when the vehicle speed is 30 km/h(18 mph) or less.

To change “N” mode to “HI”, push theswitch once.

To change “LO” mode to “HI”, push theswitch twice.

Selecting “N” mode—

To change “HI” mode to “N”, push theheight select switch on the “�” side once.

If the underbody of the vehicle hastouched the surface on bumpy roads, thevehicle height cannot be lowered with theheight select switch.

To change “LO” mode to “N”, push theheight select switch on the “�” side once.

Selecting “LO” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “�”side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change “N” mode to “LO”, push theswitch once.

To change “HI” mode to “LO”, push theswitch twice.


Even if the engine is stopped while thevehicle height is being lowered, the opera-tion continues for up to 35 seconds. If,within this 35 seconds, any of the sidedoors or the back door is opened, opera-tion will continue for a further 15 seconds.

When adjusting the vehicle height withone or more doors open, make sure thatthere is nothing that might come into con-tact with the vehicle body or around thedoors.


192


NOTICE

� If the vehicle height is changed fre-quently when the vehicle is heavilyloaded, the compressor may over-heat, causing the vehicle height ad-justment operation to stop.

� Before you lower the vehicle heightwith the height select switch, checkunder the vehicle to make surenothing to damage the vehicle orno one to be injured is there andthat the underbody of the vehicledoes not touch the ground.

� After unloading, the height of a ve-hicle equipped with the rear heightcontrol air suspension becomesslightly higher than the normal ve-hicle height. Take sufficient carewhere the overhead height is re-stricted.

� Do not select “LO” mode for bumpyroads. If the underbody of the ve-hicle touches the road surface, thevehicle may be damaged.

If you attempt to adjust the vehicle heightwith anything such as snow, ice, or stonesin contact with the vehicle body, the ve-hicle height may not change. In this case,stop the vehicle, press the mode selectswitch, and check that manual controlmode indicator light comes on. Then, re-move the obstruction.

CAUTION

If you drive through water, set thevehicle height to “HI” with the heightselect switch and then change tomanual control mode by pushing themode select switch. Do not exceed 30km/h (18 mph) or “HI” mode will au-tomatically change to “N” mode. Donot drive through water deeper thanabout 700 mm (28 in.) even if thevehicle height is in “HI” mode.

NOTICE

� When jacking up or insta lling tirechains, be sure to set manual con-trol mode by pushing the mode se-lect switch and stop the engine.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an ac-cident.

� If your vehicle must be towed, setthe vehicle height to “N” andchange to manual control mode.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an ac-cident.

� If your vehicle gets stuck in aditch, set manual control mode bypushing the mode select switch.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an ac-cident.


193


(d) Indicator lights


2. Manual control mode indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, allthe indicator lights come on. The indicatorlight showing the present mode only re-mains on and all other lights go off aftera few seconds. This means the systemoperates correctly.

If you change the vehicle height mode,the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height from“N” mode to “HI”:

1. The “N” mode indicator light goes offand the “HI” mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reaches“HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicator lightremains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle hastouched the surface on bumpy roads orthe area around the rear suspension iscoated with ice, the vehicle height cannotbe changed with the height select switch.In this case, move the vehicle or removethe ice around the rear suspension. Thevehicle height will change to the selectedmode, after a while, when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.

In the following cases, there is a problemsomewhere in you rear height control airsuspension. Although there is no problemto continue normal driving, have the rearheight control air suspension checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The height control indicator light andmanual control mode indicator light donot come on when the ignition switchis turned on.

� The manual control mode indicator lightblinks.


194


(e) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to parkthe vehicle after off–road driving, the ve-hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-hicle becomes cool. When parking, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time,the vehicle height may be gradually low-ered. When parking for a long time, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle heightmay change in accordance with thechange in the temperature. When youstart the engine, the vehicle returns to theprevious height.

(f) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in therear height control air suspension, “N”mode is automatically selected. If this oc-curs, the manual control mode indicatorlight blinks and the vehicle height controlcannot be activated until the malfunctionis corrected. If this is the case, bring yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible and have it checked.

(a) Selecting manual control mode

To select manual control mode, pushthe mode select switch with the vehiclestopped. The manual control mode indi-cator light comes on and the vehicleheight is fixed at the current height.The height can be adjusted by pushingthe height select switch.

The selected height is memorized in thesystem even after the engine is stopped.

If you push the mode select switch again,the manual control mode indicator lightgoes out and automatic control mode isselected.

—Manual control mode


195


In manual control mode, the automatic lev-eling function is turned off. When the ve-hicle height is changed because of theconditions (load etc.), you can adjust thevehicle height with the height selectswitch.

In manual control mode, if the vehiclespeed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph), auto-matic control mode is activated and “N” isselected automatically.

If you attempt to adjust the vehicle heightwith anything such as snow, ice, or stonesin contact with the vehicle body, the ve-hicle height may not change. In this case,stop the vehicle and remove the obstruc-tion.

CAUTION

If you drive through water, set thevehicle height to “HI” with the heightselect switch and then change tomanual control mode by pushing themode select switch. Do not exceed 30km/h (18 mph) or “HI” mode will au-tomatically change to “N” mode. Donot drive through water deeper thanabout 700 mm (28 in.) even if thevehicle height is in “HI” mode.

NOTICE

� When jacking up or insta lling tirechains, be sure to set manual con-trol mode by pushing the mode se-lect switch and stop the engine.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an ac-cident.

� If your vehicle must be towed, setthe vehicle height to “N” in auto-matic control mode, then selectmanual control mode by pushingthe mode select switch. Otherwise,the vehicle height may change be-cause of the automatic levelingfunction, resulting in an accident.

� If your vehicle gets stuck in aditch, set manual control mode withthe mode select switch. Otherwise,the vehicle height may change be-cause of the automatic levelingfunction, resulting in an accident.

(b) Vehicle height adjustment

To change the vehicle height in manualmode, push the height select switch oneither side of “ �” (higher) or “ �”(lower).

A higher vehicle height is suitable whendriving on bumpy roads and through water.A lower vehicle height allows for easyaccess to the vehicle (getting in and out)and easy loading and unloading.

When you are driving on bumpy roads,which may cause the suspension to fullyelongate, the rear height control air sus-pension may not operate.


196


To raise the vehicle height—

Push the “�” side of the switch for twoseconds or more. Each time you push theswitch, the vehicle height increases. Whenthe vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8in.) higher than the standard height, the“HI” indicator light comes on.

The maximum selectable height is about40 mm (1.6 in.) higher than the standardheight.

To lower the vehicle height—

Push the “�” side of the switch. Eachtime you push the switch, the vehicleheight decreases.

Two–wheel drive models—

When the vehicle height is about 7.5 mm(0.3 in.) lower than the standard height,the “LO” indicator light comes on.

The minimum selectable height is about15 mm (0.6 in.) lower than the standardheight.

Four–wheel drive models—

When the vehicle height is about 15 mm(0.6 in.) lower than the standard height,the “LO” indicator light comes on.

The minimum selectable height is about30 mm (1.2 in.) lower than the standardheight.


When adjusting the vehicle height withone or more doors open, make sure thatthere is nothing that might come into con-tact with the vehicle body or around thedoors.

If the vehicle height is adjusted on theslope, or with the selector lever in a posi-tion other than “P” or “N” while the vehicleis stopped, you may hear a sound causedby the expansion and contraction of thepropeller shaft. This does not indicate amalfunction.

CAUTION

The higher vehicle height should beonly set for severe off–road drivingconditions. Because the vehicle’s cen-ter of gravity is higher in this setting,the vehicle may become unstablewhen turning abruptly, resulting in anaccident.

NOTICE

� When lowering the vehicle, the ve-hicle must be stopped. Otherwise,when the vehicle speed exceeds 30km/h (18 mph), automatic controlmode is activated and “N” is se-lected automatically. Proper cautionshould be taken in places where theoverhead height is limited.

� If the vehicle height is changed fre-quently when the vehicle is heavilyloaded, the compressor may over-heat, causing the vehicle height ad-justment operation to stop.

� Before you lower the vehicle heightwith the height select switch, checkunder the vehicle to make surenothing to damage the vehicle orno one to be injured is there andthat the underbody of the vehicledoes not touch the ground.

� After unloading, the height of a ve-hicle equipped with the rear heightcontrol air suspension becomesslightly higher than the normal ve-hicle height. Take sufficient carewhere the overhead height is re-stricted.


197


� Do not lower the vehicle height forbumpy roads. If the underbody ofthe vehicle touches the road sur-face, the vehicle may be damaged.

(c) Indicator lights


2. Manual control mode indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, allthe indicator lights come on. The indicatorlight showing the present mode only re-mains on and all other lights go off aftera few seconds. This means the systemoperates correctly.

When you change the vehicle height inmanual mode, the height control indicatorlight changes as follows:

Two–wheel drive models

“HI”: 20 mm (0.8 in.) or higher than thestandard height

“N”: Between –7.5 mm (0.3 in.) and 20mm (0.8 in.) of the standardheight

“LO”: Lower than –7.5 mm (0.3 in.) ofthe standard height


“HI”: 20 mm (0.8 in.) or higher than thestandard height

“N”: Between –15mm (0.6 in.) and 20mm (0.8 in.) of the standardheight

“LO”: Lower than –15 mm (0.6 in.) ofthe standard height


198


In the following cases, there is a problemsomewhere in you rear height control airsuspension. Although there is no problemto continue normal driving, have the rearheight control air suspension checked byyou Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The height control indicator light andmanual control mode indicator light donot come on when the ignition switchis turned on.

� The manual control mode indicator lightblinks.

(d) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to parkthe vehicle after off–road driving, the ve-hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-hicle becomes cool. When parking, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

If you park the vehicle for a long time,the vehicle height may be gradually low-ered. When parking for a long time, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle heightmay change in accordance with thechange in the temperature.

(e) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in therear height control air suspension, themanual control mode indicator light blinks.If this is the case, change to the automat-ic control mode by pushing the mode se-lect switch, and bring your vehicle to yourToyota dealer as soon as possible to haveit checked.

The tire pressure warning system is de-signed to provide warning when tireinflation pressure of one or more ofyour tires (including the spare tire) islow. The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on to inform you that low tireinflation pressure may hamper driving.

Tire pressure warningsystem—


199


LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. It goes offafter a few seconds. This indicates thatthe tire pressure warning system is func-tioning properly.

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on or blinks, do the following.

If the warning light comes on:

Stop your vehicle in a safe place assoon as possible and check that theinflation pressure of all tires (includingthe spare tire) is as specified on thetire and loading information label. (See“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 429 in Section 7–2.) If the warninglight comes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, you may have aflat tire. If you have a flat tire, replaceit with the spare tire. For details, see“If you have a flat tire” on page 387 inSection 4.

The warning light goes off a few minutesafter air is put into the deflated tire.

This warning light may turn on due tonatural causes such as natural air leaksor tire pressure changes caused by tem-perature. In this case, adjusting the tirepressure will turn off the warning light.

CAUTION

When the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, observe the following in-structions:

� Depending on the conditions, re-duce to an appropriate speed assoon as possible.

� Adjust the tire pressure to the spe-cified level as soon as possible.

� Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-vering and braking. Tire deteriora-tion may reduce steering wheel con-trol and brake effectiveness. Thismay lead to serious injury or death.

� The tire pressure warning systemmay not activate immediately if sud-den bursts of air leakage occur.


200


NOTICE

� Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as air pressure sensors will bedamaged.

� When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror authorized tire dealer. The tirepressure sensors will be affected bythe installation or removal of tires.

� The tire pressure warning system isnot to be used as a substitute forregular inspections. Be sure tocheck the air pressure in the tireson a regular basis.

� When the tires must be replaced,replace the grommets for air pres-sure sensors as well.

If the warning light blinks:

The tire pressure warning system maybe malfunctioning. Contact your Toyotadealer.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

The tire pressure warning system doesnot function properly under certain cir-cumstances. In the following cases, thelow tire pressure warning light may notcome on even if the tire inflation pres-sure is low, or it may come on whenthe tire inflation pressure is actuallynormal.

� Electric devices or facilities using simi-lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

� A radio set to similar frequencies is inuse.

� A lot of snow or ice covers the ve-hicle, in particular, around the wheelsor wheel housings.

� The tires are not equipped with an airpressure sensor.

� Snow tires or tire chains are used.

� Non–genuine Toyota wheels are used.

� The sensor battery is expired.

� Radio waves from the air pressure sen-sor installed on the spare tire cannotbe received.

CAUTION

� The use of non–genuine wheels willcause the air pressure sensors totransmit the electronic code in dif-ferent manner, resulting in the sys-tem failure.

� The use of different type of tireswith genuine wheels may alsocause the malfunction of the sys-tem.


201


CAUTION

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning light is lit, one ormore of your tires is significantly un-der–inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tireinformation placard. Driving on a sig-nificantly under–inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under–inflation also re-duces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ab ility. Each tire,including the spare, should bechecked monthly when cold and setto the recommended inflation pres-sure as specified in the vehicle plac-ard and owner’s manual.





202


NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

When replacing the wheels, be sure toinstall air pressure sensors on thewheels.

There are 3 ways to set up the air pres-sure sensors:

a. Remove the sensor from the old wheeland install it to the new wheel.

b. Keep the same wheel with air pressuresensor and replace only the tire.

c. Use a new wheel and sensor. In thiscase, you have to register an ID codefor a new sensor.

CAUTION

Have the tires, wheels or sensors re-placed and ID codes registered by aToyota dealer. If you need sensors,purchase from a Toyota dealer.

—Replacing tires and wheels


203


TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMRESET SWITCH

The tire pressure warning system needto be initialized in the following condi-tions:

� After replacing or rotating tires orwheels

� After replacing an air pressure sen-sor.

When initializing the system, the pres-ent tire condition is stored as a stan-dard.

To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe place andapply the parking brake. Stop the en-gine.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified level. (See “Tires”on page 458 in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

4. Push and hold the reset switch untilthe low tire pressure warning lightblinks three times.

Initialization is completed or over for morethan 20 minutes.

When initializing the system, make surethe low tire pressure warning light blinksthree times. If the warning light does notblink three times, initialization will fail andthe tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly. In this case, initializethe system again.

Do not push the reset switch without ad-justing the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level. Otherwise, the low tirepressure warning light may not come oneven if the tire pressure is low, or it maycome on when the tire inflation pressureis actually normal.

If you push the reset switch while thevehicle is moving, initialization is not per-formed.


204


If the low tire pressure warning light doesnot blink when you push and hold thereset switch, have the low pressure warn-ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Parking brake


205


The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the“ON–OFF” button. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er press will turn the system completelyoff.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON–OFF” buttonoff when not using the cruise control.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Cruise control


206


If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Pushing “ON–OFF” button.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “– SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “– SET” direction.

Even if you turn off the overdrive switch,with the cruise control on, engine brakingwill not be applied because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control lever or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON–OFF” buttonto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


207


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio/video systemReference 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat audio system 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video system operating hints 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 8


208


Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player (with compact discchanger controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player with changer

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” to turn on that function withoutpushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-sette or compact disc player, a cassetteor compact disc must be loaded in theplayer.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If the another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” if the system is already on butyou want to switch from one function toanother.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics


209


TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange, and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange, and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed onthe inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Attaching the film (especially conduc-tive or metallic type) on the rearquarter glass will noticeably reducethe sensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The player will play from track1 through the end of the disc. Then it willplay from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.


210


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. (The player will auto-matically eject a disc if the label side isdown.) This compact disc player can storeup to six discs. The player will play fromtrack 1 through the end of the disc. Thenit will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc changer. Insertonly one compact disc into slot ata time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.


211


Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1


212


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The button num-ber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The button num-ber and station frequency will appear onthe display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto–reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID (on some models): Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.


213


BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the four followingerror messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up–sidedown). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

Push “ ” to listen the tracks on the

disc in random order. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The disc you arelistening to will play in random order. Toturn off the random feature, push this but-ton again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.


214


Compact disc player

Push “ ” while the track is playing.

“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically bereplayed. This process will be continueduntil you push the button again to turn offthe repeat feature.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

Push “ ” to scan the tracks on a spe-cific disc. “ ” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan all the trackson the disc you are listening to. To selecta track, push “SCAN” again. If the playerscanned all the tracks on the disc, it willstop scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, theplayer automatically reverses sides andresumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.


215


Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.

TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


216


Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2


217


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttonswhen you turn on the RDS (see “RDS”button).

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM andRDS stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FMTYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but-ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).


(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.



218


Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.


The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the four followingerror messages.


“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up–sidedown). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.


� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.


219


FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.This system allows you to set twelve FMand six RDS stations, three for each ofthe preset button. If the RDS is off orRDS stations are not preset to the presetbuttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on thedisplay.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.


220


RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with RadioData System (RDS). RDS station providinggood reception is automatically selected ifcurrent reception worsens.

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on andoff. This button is operational except inAM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold thisbutton until you hear a beep and “RDS”will appear on the display. At this time,the radio starts to search the RDS sta-tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on thedisplay.

Quickly push and release this button whenthe RDS turns on, the radio starts tosearch the RDS stations and “RDSSEARCH” will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found,“FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-tions will appear on the display, and youwill hear two beeps. The stations will bepreset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, “NORDS ST” will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep, and the displayreturns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button untilyou hear a beep again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.


221


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.


A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.


222


TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDSmode.

When an RDS radio station transmits atext message, “TEXT” will be displayed. Atthis time, push the “TEXT” button to viewthe text message. The message displaywill be canceled if any button that affectsthe display is pushed. To view the mes-sage again, push this button again. Afterthe entire message has been displayed,the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory tostore three 64–character messages. Tostore a message in memory, push andhold the “TEXT” button until you hear abeep.

If three messages are already stored inmemory, the oldest message will be over-written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis-play the most recent message. Each pushof the button will display messages in theorder of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or ifthere are no more messages to be re-called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on thedisplay, and the message display will becanceled.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will start seeking any traffic programstation.

When a traffic program station is found,“TRAF” will be displayed and you will heara beep.

After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display for afew seconds and the display returns tothe previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


223


TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button whilereceiving an RDS station, the current pro-gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro-gram type changes as in the following:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� ALERT (Emergency message)


224


Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)


225


1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-ume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “–” to decrease the volume. Thevolume continues to decrease while theswitch is being pushed.

2. “ ��” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-tion:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switchuntil the track you want to listen to is set.If you push the switch ten times, the skipfunction will turn off. (You can skip up tonine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracksyou want to rewind, remember to countthe current track as well. For example, ifyou want to rewind to a song that is twotracks before the song you are listeningto, push the “�” side of the switch threetimes.

If you push the track switch further thanyou wanted to, push the other side of theswitch. The track number will be in-creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of thetracks remaining on the current side ofthe cassette.

� When the tape reaches to the begin-ning, the player will automatically startplaying that side.

� After the tape reaches to the end, theplayer will automatically reverse andstart playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track switchto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spoken, live,or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “�” side of the switchto fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” willappear on the display. Push and hold the“�” side of the switch to rewind a tape.“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “�” side of the switch. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, pushthe “�” side of the switch.


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.


226



While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the switch.

3. “MODE” switch

Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-dio mode. Each push changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is readyto use. The DVD player will be selectableif a rear seat entertainment system isinstalled in your vehicle.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

The rear seat audio system is designedfor the rear seat passengers to enjoy theaudio sound separately between the frontseats and the rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turnedon with the rear audio system controllereven if the front audio system is off.When the front audio is turned off, therear audio system will be turned off simul-taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all themodes (AM and FM radio, cassette tapeplayer and compact disc player withchanger) with the rear seat audio systemwhen a cassette tape and a compact discare loaded in the front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems at the sametime, the system can be operated on thefront audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainmentsystem with commercial headphone. See“—Headphone input jacks” on page 234 inthis Section for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-tainment system with a wireless head-phone. The wireless headphone can beused within rear seat. If the signal be-comes weak, the headphone will mute.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not drive with using the head-phone. Otherwise, you may be hardto hear the sound from the outsidewhile using the headphone and maycause an accident.

Rear seat audio system—


227


The rear seat audio system consists offollowing components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Rear seat audio system controller

4. Headphone volume control dials

5. Headphone input jacks

6. Controller holder

The rear seat audio system can be oper-ated with the rear seat audio system con-troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

—Rear seat audio systemcontroller


228


BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-troller, direct the signal output portionof the controller to the signal receptionportion of the rear seat audio systemdisplay.

The rear seat audio system controller canbe operated when the ignition switch is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures of the controller, see“CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 230in this Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.


229


CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in theholder when it is not in use. The holdercan be hooked on the back of the driv-er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as on theinstrument panel) for a long time,otherwise the controller may be dam-aged.


230


CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

4. “OFF” button

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 211 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button. The radio will tune in the nextpreset station up or down the band. Thestation frequency will appear on the dis-play.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button to select the other side of a cas-sette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected. (“ ” indicatesthe top side, “ ” indicates the bottomside.)


Compact disc player with changer


Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.


Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time youpush the button, the radio will step up ordown to another frequency. If you pushand hold the button, and the radio will gointo the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up ordown for a station of the nearest frequen-cy and will stop on reception. Each timeyou push the button, the stations will besearched one after another.


231



This button has the following features—

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)button until “FF” will appears on the dis-play to forward a tape. Push and hold the“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.To stop the tape while it is rewinding,push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.


To skip up or down to locate a song orrecording:


Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.

Compact disc player


To skip up or down to a different track:Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton until the number of the track you wantto listen to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, quickly push the “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reversewithin a compact disc. When you releasethe button, the compact disc player willresume playing.

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

Push “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on therear seat audio system.

Use “ON/SOURCE” button to select anaudio mode when the rear seat audio sys-tem is on. Each time you push this but-ton, the system changes between the ra-dio, cassette player and compact discplayer.

When you change the mode, the displayindicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and compact discsare not loaded in the front audio system,only a radio mode can be selected in therear seat audio system.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button to se-lect the casette tape player mode or com-pact disc player mode in that case, abeep sounds from front audio system and“INVALID” flashes on the screen for 6seconds, and then the rear audio systemreturns to the radio mode.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button whilereceiving an emergency broadcast, a beepsounds and “INVALID” appears on thescreen to indicate that no button can beoperated.


232


Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the screen.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a trafficannouncement (TA) while the rear seataudio system is in the radio mode,“TRAF” will flash on the screen and therear seat audio system will turn off. Whenthe front audio receives a traffic an-nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will screen one of the four followingerror messages.


“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damagedor inserted incorrectly (up–side down).Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside thesystem. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

“ERR 4”: Over–current. Ask your Toyotadealer to inspect.


4. “OFF” button

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rearseat audio system.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY


CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE


� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local regulations.


233


Replace the battery by using the followingprocedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing thelock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put in a new battery with the positive(+) side up.

Put in the case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure that the positive side ofthe controller battery is facing cor-rectly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertionand that dust or oil does not ad-here to the transmitter case.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.


234


You can enjoy the rear seat audio sys-tem with commercial headphone.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.


To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the knob. Turn right to increase thevolume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

With some headphone generally availablein the market, it may be difficult to catchsound properly. Toyota recommends theuse of Toyota genuine headphone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

—Headphone input j acks


235


The rear seat entertainment system con-sists of the following components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat entertainment system display

3. Rear seat entertainment systemcontroller

4. DVD player

5. Headphone input jacks

6. Power outlet

7. Input terminal adapter

8. Headphone volume control dials

9. Controller holder


Rear seat entertainment system—


236


The rear seat entertainment system is de-signed for the rear passengers to enjoyaudio and DVD video separately from thefront audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated when the ignition key is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,compact disc player with changer andDVD player) on the rear seat entertain-ment system only if a cassette tape anda compact disc are loaded in the frontaudio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canplay DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CDtext, dts–CD or DVD audio only when adisc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound whenyour personal audio system is connectedto the input terminal adapter on the rearconsole box. For details, refer to themanufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainmentsystem with commercial headphone. See“—Headphone input jacks” on page 282 inthis Section for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-tainment system with a wireless head-phone. The wireless headphone can beused within rear seat. If the signal be-comes weak, the headphone will mute.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with using the head-phone. Otherwise, you may be hardto hear the sound from the outsidewhile using the headphone and maycause an accident.

� Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.


237


To open the display, push the lock releasebutton.

Push down the display to the desiredangle.

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with adry soft cloth. If the screen is pushedby hand or wiped with a hard cloth,the surface of the screen may bescratched.

To close, push up the display until youhear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-cally turned off when the display isclosed. However, the rear seat entertain-ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, close the display whenit is not in use.

—Display


238


NOTICE

� The screen should be cleaned witha dry soft cloth. If the screen ispushed by hand or wiped with ahard cloth, the surface of thescreen may be scratched.

� Benzene or alkaline solutions maydamage the coated surface of thescreen .

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not turn on the rearseat entertainment system longerthan necessary when the engine isnot running.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated with the rear seat entertain-ment system controller. The system can-not be operated by touching the switcheson the screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet.

—Rear seat entertainmentsystem controller


239


USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-tem controller, direct the signal outputportion of the controller to the signalreception portion of the rear seat enter-tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in theholder when it is not in use. The holdercan be hooked on the back of the driv-er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe holder when it is not in use.


240


NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as on theinstrument panel) for a long time,otherwise the controller may be dam-aged.


241


CONTROL BUTTONS


These buttons operate the front audiosystem or select the track/chapterwhen the DVD player is operated.

2. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

These buttons skip directly to a desiredpreset station, disc, track or chapter.

3. “CURSOR” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated.

4. Joy stick

This joy stick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

6. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.

7. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,contrast and brightness of the screen.


242


8. “VIDEO” button

This button turns on the video modewhen your personal audio device isconnected.

9. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

10. “RETURN” button

This button skips to the predeterminedscene for the disc when the DVD play-er is operated.

11. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set upscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

12. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title searchscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

13. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of thescreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

14. “��” button

This button fast forwards a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

15. “�” button

This button plays a screen when theDVD player is operated.

16. “ ” button

This button pauses a screen when theDVD player is operated.

17. “��” button

This button reverse a screen when theDVD player is operated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selectionscreen for DVD video when the DVDplayer is operated.

19. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-dio screen when the DVD player isoperated.

20. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-title screen when the DVD player isoperated.

21. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screenfor DVD video when the DVD player isoperated.

22. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-tertainment system.


243


To turn on the system, push the“SOURCE” button.

The screen indicates which mode can beselected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” but-ton when the connected DVD player oryour personal audio machine is on. Therear seat entertainment system will beturned on.

The rear seat entertainment system canselect all the modes.

When a cassette tape, a compact disc, aDVD video disc, an audio CD, a videoCD, a CD text, a dts–CD or a DVD audiodisc is not loaded on the front audio sys-tem or the DVD player, only the radiomode can be selected on the rear seatentertainment system.

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”button.

When the front audio system is turned off,the rear audio system and the DVD playerwill be turned off simultaneously.

All the modes of the front audio systemcan be operated on the rear seat enter-tainment system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems simulta-neously, the system can be operated onthe front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

—Turning the rear seatentertainment system on andoff

—Front audio systemoperation


244


SELECTING THE MODE

Use the joy stick to select the mode.Push the “ENT” button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected bythe joy stick is colored blue. When the“ENT” button is pushed, the mode displaychanges to green. If the mode display isgray, it cannot be selected.

The “Speaker sound” on the mode displayis selected on the front audio system.

Radio

Cassette tape player and compact discplayer


245


When you select a mode, the screen indi-cates which is selected.

Radio

AM mode:

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the screen.

FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the screen.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM

To operate the front audio system, usethe following switches.

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 211 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button. The radio will tune in the nextpreset station up or down the band. Thestation frequency will appear on thescreen.


Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button to select the other side of a cas-sette tape. The screen indicates whichside is currently selected. (“ ” indicatesthe top side, “ ” indicates the bottomside.)


Compact disc player with changer


Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.


246



Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time youpush the button, the radio will step up ordown to another frequency. If you pushand hold the button, and the radio will gointo the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up ordown for a station of the nearest frequen-cy and will stop on reception. Each timeyou push the button, the stations will besearched one after another.



To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)button until “FF” will appears on the dis-play to forward a tape. Push and hold the“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.To stop the tape while it is rewinding,push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.


To skip up or down to locate a song orrecording:


Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thescreen.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the screen reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.

Compact disc player


To skip up or down to a different track:Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton until the number of the track you wantto listen to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, quickly push the “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reversewithin a compact disc. When you releasethe button, the compact disc player willresume playing.


247


REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY


CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE


� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the followingprocedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing thelock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put in a new battery with the positive(+) side up.

Put it in the case securely.

NOTICE

� Be sure that the positive side ofthe controller battery is facing cor-rectly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.


248


� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertionand that dust or oil does not ad-here to the transmitter case.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

The DVD player is set in the consolebox.

The DVD player can play audio CDs,DVD video discs, CD texts, dts–CDsand video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see“Audio/video system operating hints” onpage 283.

To access the DVD player, pull up theconsole box lid while pushing the lockrelease button.

The DVD player works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc mustbe loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the three followingerror messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,damaged or it was inserted upside down.Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen: It indicates that the DVD re-gion code is not set properly.

—DVD player


249


If “DVD ERROR” appears on thescreen: There is a problem inside theplayer. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.


INSERTING THE DISC

To open the DVD player, push the lidbackward.

Insert a disc and push the lid forwardto close the DVD player.

When you insert a disc, push it in gentlywith the label side up.

If the label faces down, the disc cannotbe played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,“DISC CHECK” will also appear on thescreen. For appropriate discs for this play-er, see “Audio/video system operatinghints” on page 283.

The player is intended for the use with 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.


250


The indicator light turns on while the discis loaded.

The player will play the track or chapter,and it will play from the beginning of thetrack or chapter again after it reaches theend.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the DVD player. Do not insertanything other than a disc into theslot.

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the lid backward to open the DVDplayer. Push the disc eject button toeject a disc.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

—Selecting the DVD mode


251


To select the DVD mode, push the“DVD” button on the controller.

You can also select the DVD mode on themode selection screen mentioned above.

Vehicles with navigation system—The“DVD Hint!” screen appears when theDVD mode is first selected after youturn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“ON” position.

Push the “OK” switch when you read themessage.

The DVD player can be operated with thecontroller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “MENU” button

3. “TOP MENU” button

4. “RETURN” button

5. “SET UP” button

6. “SEARCH” button

7. “ANGLE” button

8. “AUDIO” button

9. “SUB TITLE” button

10. “ ”, “�”, “��” and “��” buttons

—DVD player operationswitches


252


The player can also be operated with theswitches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,select the switch by the joy stick andpush the “ENT” button. You cannot selectthe switches on the screen by touchingthem directly.

When the switch is selected by the joystick, the outline of the switch changes toblue. Push the “ENT” button, and theswitch will be highlighted in green.

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHESON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, pushthe “CURSOR” button on the controller.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operationswitch)


253


Top page (DVD audio operation switch)

Second page (DVD audio operationswitch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)

There are operation switches on the “TopPage” and “Second Page” screens.

To change the screen, push the “TopPage” or “Second Page” switch on thescreen.


254


If “ ” appears on the screen whenyou select a switch, it indicates thatthe switch cannot work.

To turn off the switches on the screen,push the “CURSOR” button on the control-ler once again or push the “Hide Keys” onthe screen.


255


NOTE: The playback condition of someDVD video discs may be determined bya DVD video software producer. ThisDVD player plays a disc as the softwareproducer intended. So, some functionsmay not work properly. Be sure to readthe instruction manual for the DVD vid-eo disc separately provided. For de-tailed information about DVD videodiscs, see “—DVD video disc informa-tion” on page 278 in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, DVDaudio, video CD or audio tracks may notrecord in some cases while the menu isdisplayed. As audio will not play in thiscase, verify that the video tracks are play-ing and then activate playback.

When playback of a disc is completed:

� If an audio CD is playing, the firsttrack starts.

� If a DVD video, DVD audio or videoCD is playing, playback will stop or themenu screen will be displayed.

The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while playingback certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDsis recorded at a low volume to em-phasize the impact of sound effects.If you adjust the volume assumingthat the conversations represent themaximum volume level available forthe DVD, you may be startled bylouder sound effects or when youchange to a different audio source.Loud sounds may have a significantimpact on the human body or pose adriving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

DVD video

DVD audio

—DVD player operation (DVDvideo/DVD audio)


256


TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THEDISC ON OR OFF

DVD video—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switchon the screen. You can also turn on themenu screen by pushing the “MENU” or“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.

DVD audio—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” switch on thescreen. You can also turn on the menuscreen by pushing the “TOP MENU”switch on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe separate manual for the DVD disc.

To turn on the selecting switch, push the“ ” switch.


257


To select the menu for the disc, push the“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on thescreen. Push the “Enter” switch to selectthe menu for the disc.

You can also select the menu for the discby the joy stick and the “ENT” button onthe controller when the control switchesare not indicated on the screen.

Push the “Shift Keys” on the screen, andthe switches (“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “Enter”and “Shift Keys” switches) will move upand down.

To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”switch on the screen. To turn on theswitch again, push the “ON” switch on thescreen.

To return to the previous screen, push the“Back” switch on the screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

OPERATING THE “ ”, “�”, “��” AND“��” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto pause the disc.

“�” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto cancel the pause and return to normalplaying.

“��” and “��” switches/buttons: Pushand hold the “��” or “��” switch/buttonto fast forward or reverse. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, release the switch/button.

DVD video only—

Push the “��” or “��” switch/buttonwhile pausing, the DVD video plays theslow–motion video replay or the slow–mo-tion video replay in reverse.


258


DVD video

DVD audio

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINEDSCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, pushthe “Return” switch. The DVD player startsplaying from the beginning of the predeter-mined screen. You can also display thescreen by pushing the “RETURN” buttonon the controller.

For further details of the predeterminedscreen, see the separate manual for theDVD disc.

DVD video

DVD audio


259


SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

To display the searching title (DVD video)or group (DVD audio) screen, push the“Search” switch on the screen. You canalso display the screen by pushing the“SEARCH” button on the controller.

DVD video

DVD audio

DVD video—

Select the title number by using the “–”,“+” and “+10” switches and push the “En-ter” switch to enter the number. The play-er starts playing disc for that title number.The selected title number will appear onthe screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

DVD audio—

Enter the group number by using the “–”and “+” switches. The selected groupnumber will appear on the screen. Pushthe “Enter” switch. The player starts play-ing the disc from the entered group num-ber.

Push the “Back” switch to return to theprevious screen.


260


SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only—

Enter the bonus group number on thesearching group screen and push the “En-ter” switch. The “Enter Key Code” screenwill appear. To enter the number of thegroup you want to play, push the groupnumber. If you enter the wrong number,push the “Clear” switch to delete the num-ber.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.The player starts playing the disc from theselected bonus group number.

CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switchon the screen to forward or reverse thestill pictures.

DVD video

DVD audio


261


CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,and then the changing subtitle languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”button on the controller.

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”switch.


The selected subtitle language will appearon the screen.


262


CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVDvideo only)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screenand then the changing audio languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “AUDIO” buttonon the controller.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

The selected audio language will appearon the screen.



263


CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audioonly)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen orthe “AUDIO” button on the controller andthe changing audio format screen will ap-pear.

Each time you touch the “Audio” switch,another audio format stored on the disc isselected.


DVD video

DVD audio


264


CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,and then the changing angle screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “ANGLE” button on thecontroller.

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi–angle compatible when the“ ” mark appears on the screen. Eachtime you push the “Angle” switch, theangle changes. The angle number whichyou can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide”switch.


DVD video

DVD audio


265


CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,and then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Setup Menu 1 screen

Setup Menu 2 screen

There are initial setting switches on the“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”screens.

To change the screen, push the “TopPage” or “Second Page” switch on thescreen.

After you change the initial setting, pushthe “Enter” switch. The initial settingswitch will be turned off and return to thepicture previously.

When the “Initial Setting” switch on “SetupMenu 2” is pushed, all menus are initial-ized.


266


CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Lang.” switch on the“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select AudioLanguage” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear onthe screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want tohear, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterAudio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to hear, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

If numbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to hearagain.

To return to the “Select Audio Language”screen, push the “Back” switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,push the “Subtitle Lang.” switch on the“Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterSubtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.


267


To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “DVD Language” switchon the “Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterDVD Language Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.


268


TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OROFF

The angle mark can be turned on fordiscs that are multi–angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”switch on the screen, the angle markturns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWERRESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen bysetting the viewer restrictions. You canprevent the restriction with a password.Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, pushthe “Parental” switch on the “Setup Menu1” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”screen will appear.

Push the number for the password andthe “Enter” switch. The “Select RestrictionLevel” screen will appear.

If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

You cannot change the setting without in-putting the password. When you forget orchange the password, push the “Clear”switch ten times to initialize the password.



269


Push a parental level (1—8). The smallerthe level number, the stricter the age limit.Push the “Back” switch to return to the“Setup Menu 1” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Each time you push the “Display Mode”switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, thedisplay mode is changed from wide modeto auto mode.

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese


270


0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots–Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay


271


1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto–Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo–Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu


272


SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the “ ”or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button on the con-troller until the number of the chapter/track you want to select appears on thescreen.

DVD video

DVD audio

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. To stop scanning, pushthis switch again. If the player scannedall the tracks on the disc, it will stopscanning.


273


5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switchto fast forward or reverse a disc. Whenyou release the switch, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER(video CD only)

Push the “Sel. Number” switch and thenthe disc menu number search screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “SEARCH” switch on thecontroller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the“–”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the“Enter” switch. The player starts playingthe disc from the entered disc menu num-ber. The entered disc menu number willappear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

Move up and down the switches by push-ing “Shift keys” on the screen.

—DVD player operation (videoCD/audio CD/CD text)


274


OPERATING THE “ ”, “ �”, “ ��” AND“��” SWITCHES

“ ” switch: Push this switch to pause thedisc.

“�” switch: Push this switch to cancel thepause and return to normal playing.

“��” and “��” switches: Push thisswitch to fast forward or reverse. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the “��” switch/button while paus-ing, the video CD plays the slow–motionvideo replay.

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (videoCD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on themenu screen for the disc. You can alsoturn on the menu screen by pushing the“RETURN” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK(video CD only)

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. MenuPrev.” switch while the disc menu is dis-played. The next or previous page willappear on the screen.

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. MenuPrev.” switch while the player is playingvideo. The next or previous track will besearched and played.


275


CHANGING A MULTIPLEXTRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change amultiplex transmission. The mode changesfrom Main/Sub to Main to Sub and backto Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (videoCD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screenand then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”on page 265 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Video CD

Audio CD


276


CD text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear onthe screen when pushing the “DVD” but-ton.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc. Tostop scanning, push this switch again.When the player has scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push the “ ” or “ ” switch to fastforward or reverse the disc. When youpush the switch again, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

You can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the control-ler and then the “Display” screen will ap-pear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect thesunlight. This is not a malfunction.

—Screen adjustment


277


Each time you push the “+” or “–” switch,you can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

+ orGREEN

– or RED

COLORStrengthensthe greencolor

Strengthensthe redcolor

CONTRASTStrengthensthe contrast

Weakensthe contrast

TONEStrengthensthe tone

Weakensthe tone

BRIGHTNESS Brightens Darkens

After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”switch to return to the previous screen.

—Selecting the video mode


278


The audio machine connected to the inputterminal adapter can be played in thevideo mode.

To select the video mode, push the“VIDEO” button on the controller. You canalso select the video mode on the modeselection screen mentioned above.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-or TV formats. DVD video discs con-forming to other formats such as PALor SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discshave a region code indicating where youcan use. If the DVD video disc is notlabeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it inthis DVD player. If you attempt to play aninappropriate DVD video disc in this play-er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen. Even if the DVD video discdoes not have a region code, in somecases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC formatof color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screento be selected. Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions inwhich this video disccan be played.ALL: all countriesNumber: region code

—DVD video disc information


279


DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discthat holds video. DVD video discs haveadopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-dards of digital compression technologies.The picture data is compressed by 1/40on average and stored. Variable rate en-coded technology in which the volume ofdata assigned to the picture is changeddepending on the picture format has alsobeen adopted. Audio data is stored usingPCM and Dolby digital, which enableshigher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-ti–angle and multi–language features willalso help you enjoy the more advancedtechnology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limitswhat can be viewed in conformity with thelevel of restrictions of the country. Thelevel of restrictions varies depending onthe DVD video disc. Some DVD videodiscs cannot be played at all, or violentscenes are skipped or replaced with otherscenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for childrenand G–rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs canbe played.

Multi–angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

Multi–language feature: You can selectthe language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are providedon DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the sameregion code as the DVD player, you can-not play the disc on the DVD player. Forregion codes, see page 278.

Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audioformat DVD. Other decoded type cannotbe played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored on DVD video discs are di-vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video andaudio programs stored on DVD videodiscs. Usually, one piece of a movie, onealbum, or one audio program is assignedas a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A titlecomprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, andthe double–D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-lished works.�1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protectedby method claims of certain U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual propertyrights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other rights owners. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision Cor-poration, and is intended for home andother limited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized by MacrovisionCorporation. Reverse engineering ordisassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.


280


The rear entertainment system plays vid-eos and sound when your audio systemis connected to the input terminal adapteron the rear console box. For details, referto the manufacturer’s instructions.

To use the input terminal adapter, openthe lid.

The input terminal adapter is composed of3 input terminal adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapterRed: Audio input adapterWhite: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the input terminal adapter lidwhen the input terminal adapter is notin use. Inserting anything other thanan appropriate plug that fits theadapter may cause electrical failure orshort circuit.

This power outlet is designed for use asa power supply for the audio device con-nected to the input terminal adapter.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

—Input terminal adapter —Power outlet


281


Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet, or allowingany liquid to get into the outlet maycause electrical failure or short cir-cuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances even iftheir power consumption is under 115VAC/100W. These appliances may notoperate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode–ray tube type televisions,compressor–driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer–controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.


282


You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-ment system with commercial head-phones.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.


To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the knob. Turn right to increase thevolume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

With some headphones generally availablein the marker, it may be difficult to catchsound properly. Toyota recommends theuse of Toyota genuine headphone.


CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

—Headphone input j acks


283


NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� Do not put anything other than aDVD video, DVD audio, video CD,dts–CD and audio CD into the DVDplayer.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi–path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

Audio/video system operatinghints


284


CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high–quality cassettes.

� Low–quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto–reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

� Your compact disc player and DVDplayer are intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player and DVDplayer from working. On hot days, usethe air conditioning to cool the vehicleinterior before you use the players.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player andDVD player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer and DVD player, the playersmay not play even though they appearto be working. Remove the disc fromthe player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-ers use an invisible laser beam whichcould cause hazardous radiation ex-posure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the players correctly.


285


Compact disc player

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

SACDdts–CDCopy–protected CDCD–R (CD–Recordable)CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)CD–ROM

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

DVD audiodiscs

Video CDs

DVD player

� Use only discs marked as shownabove. The following products may notbe playable on your DVD player.

SACDCopy–protected CDCD–R (CD–Recordable)CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)CD–ROMDVD–RDVD+RDVD+RWDVD–RWDVD–ROMDVD–RAM


286


Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player or changer, orit may be impossible to eject thedisc.


287


Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint–free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint–free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti–static device.


288



289


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemFront air conditioning system

Controls 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel vents 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear air conditioning system

Controls 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 9


290


1. Temperature selector

2. “AUTO” button

3. “MODE” button (air flow selector)

4. Fan speed selector

5. “A/C” button

6. Air intake selector button

7. Windshield air flow button

8. “OFF” button

Front air conditioning system——Controls


291


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow, on–off of the air condi-tioning and air intake according to thetemperature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

When you adjust the temperature selectorto maximum cooling, a “MAX COLD” mes-sage will appear on the display and theair intake mode will be automaticallychanged to RECIRCULATE.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

In automatic operation, the fan speed isadjusted automatically unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperatu-re—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

The temperature display changes between“�C” and “�F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi–information display” onpage 302 in Section 1–10.)

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.

“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Press the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

In automatic operation, the air flow modeis selected automatically among Panel, Bi–level and Floor unless you desire anotherair flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.


292


2. Bi–level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

When you set the temperature selectorsetting at about the middle in automaticoperation, warm air flows out of thefloor vents and relatively low–tempera-ture air flows out of the center andside vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

It is recommended that you close thelower vent. For details about this, see“Instrument panel vents” on page 297in this Section.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents and fan speed may increase inorder to clean up the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

It is recommended that you close thelower vent. For details about this, see“Instrument panel vents” on page 297in this Section.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents and fanspeed may increase in order to clean upthe front view.

Pressing the button once again returns theair flow mode to the last one used.

When this button is pressed, air intakeselector mode changes to FRESH auto-matically to clean up the front view quick-ly. It is not possible to return to RECIR-CULATE in this mode.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.


293


It is recommended that you close the low-er vent. For details about this, see “Instru-ment panel vents” on page 297 in thisSection.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

For further information for removing frostand fog, see “Instrument panel vents” onpage 297 in this Section.

Air intake selector button

Press the button to select the air source.

1. RECIRCULATE—Recirculates the air in-side the vehicle.

2. FRESH—Draws outside air into thesystem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera-ture is low, the air intake mode maychange automatically to FRESH. This isnot a malfunction.

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the air intake mode is al-ways set to FRESH even if the previousmode was RECIRCULATE.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.


294


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings

: See “Instrument panel vents” on page 297 in this Section.

—Operating tips


295


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir conditioning—OFF

—For manual operation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards WARM

(to the right)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORLower vent—CLOSEDAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir conditioning—ON


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.


296


Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— Towards COLD

(to the left)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

The inside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards WARM(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELDLower vent—CLOSED



(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) to cool


Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically and fan speed may increase.This is to clean up the front view morequickly. It is not possible to return to RE-CIRCULATE in this mode.


� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

The outside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards WARM(to the right)




(to the right) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELDLower vent—CLOSED


297


Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically and fan speed may increase.This is to clean up the front view morequickly. It is not possible to return to RE-CIRCULATE in this mode.


� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Side vents

Lower vent

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.

For removing frost or fog, it is recom-mended that you close the lower ventwhen you push the windshield air flowbutton or using the “Floor” or the “Floor/windshield” mode.

Instrument panel vents


298


1. “AUTO” button

2. Air flow selector buttons

3. Temperature selector

4. Fan speed selector buttons

5. “OFF” button

6. “REAR” button

7. “FRT+RR” button

Rear air conditioning system—Controls


299


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the rear airconditioning, press the “AUTO” button. Anindicator light will illuminate to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow according to the tem-perature.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-just the fan speed and push it.

In automatic operation, the fan speed isadjusted automatically unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selectorTo increase the temperature, press the“�” side, to decrease it, press the “�”side.

The temperature display changes between“�C” and “�F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi–information display” onpage 302 in Section 1–10.)

“REAR” buttonYou can turn on or off the rear air condi-tioning system by pushing the button.

“FRT+RR” button

You can cancel the operations from therear control panel by pushing this button.

While the operation from the rear controlpanel are stopped, the front and rear airconditioning systems can be set simulta-neously from the front control panel.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system. Air flow selector

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the roofpanel vents.

2. Bi–level— Air flows from both the roofpanel vents and floor vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.


300


—Air flow selector settings


301


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentMulti–information display 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtrays 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener box 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note pad holder 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact disc and cassette tape holder 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removable console box 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie–down hooks 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 10


302


1. “E/M” button

2. Garage door opener buttons

3. “MODE” button

4. Garage door opener indicator

5. Outside temperature and cruiseinformation display

6. Compass

Multi–information display—


303


Operate the multi–information displaywith the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaymay be reduced.

—Before using themulti–information display

Indication

English/U.S.CustomarySystem (E)

Metric (M)

Outsidetemperature

�F

�C

Instantaneous fuel consumption/Average fuel consumption

MPG

L/100 km

Distance to empty

MI

km

“E/M” button

This button is used to switch between English/U.S. Customary System andmetric units.

Each time you push this button, the display switches. This is also linked to themulti–information display and the front and rear air conditioning displays. The displayvariations are as follows;

The initial mode will be English/U.S. Customary System units, however, if the unitis switched to metric and ignition switch is off, it will display metric units when theignition switch is turned to on.


304


“MODE” button

This button is used to select the item.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Outside tempera-ture and cruise information display” onpage 307 in this Section.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink � and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink �

The HomeLink � in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand–held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand–held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program. Push and holddown one of the buttons until the indi-cator corresponding to the selectedchannel begins to flash.

—Garage door opener


305


2. Place your hand–held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand–held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink �” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand–held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.


306


6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink �

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink �

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink �

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink � Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.


307


This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS–210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICrules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

The outside temperature and cruise in-formation display indicates the follow-ing information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

4. Distance to empty

5. Display off (no compass)

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles through this informa-tion.

During the off mode, the compass displayis also turned off.

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

To set the unit, push the “E/M” buttonuntil the desired unit display appears. (Atthis time, front and rear air conditioningdisplays also change.)

—Outside temperature andcruise information display


308


1. Outside temperature

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

The displayed temperature ranges from–30�C (–22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor,“––�C” (“––�F”) will appear on the display.If “––�C” (“––�F”) appears on the display,contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “––�C” (“––�F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 1seconds.

To reset the calculations, return the modeto “AVG” and push and hold the “MODE”and “E/M” button simultaneously for 2 sec-onds.

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption (“INST”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated and displayed based on dis-tance and fuel consumption for 1 sec-onds with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 1seconds.

Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in the following cases.

� The vehicle is stopped with the enginerunning. (The display will indicate theextremely high fuel consumption.)

� The vehicle is driving down a longslope, applying the engine brake. (Thedisplay will indicate the extremely lowfuel consumption.)

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

4. Distance to empty(“DTE”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger than indicated. If fuel consumptionis poor, the driving range will be shorterthan indicated.


309


The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading south.

The direction display is updated every 2seconds.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe roof.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

If the direction is not indicated or thesystem does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

—Compass


310


Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the inside ofthe roof.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the roof of the vehicle.Doing this may cause malfunction ofthe compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 307 in thisSection.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 5 sec-onds until the “VAR” indication appearson the compass display.

3. Push the “E/M” button several timesuntil the desired zone number appearson the compass display.

If the button is not pushed for 10 sec-onds, the display returns to the compass/outside temperature mode and the numberthat is last set is memorized.

To select the zone where the vehicle iscurrently located, refer to the followingmap.


311


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


312


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Inthis case, the compass needs to be cali-brated.

To calibrate the compass manually, do thefollowing;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 307 in thisSection.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 10seconds until the “CAL” indication ap-pears on the compass display. (At thistime, the compass display is locked in“N”.)

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h(5 mph) or less. If there is not enoughspace to drive in a circle, drive aroundthe block.

When the “CAL” indication goes off andthe compass returns to the normal mode,calibration is complete.

If you want to restart the calibration be-fore it is complete, push both of the“MODE” and “E/M” buttons simultaneouslyfor 10 seconds again.


313


Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.


If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication may be reduced.

Cigarette lighter and front ashtray

Rear ashtray

Clock Cigarette lighter and ashtrays


314


CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.After it finishes heating up, it automati-cally pops out ready for use.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAYS

Front: To use the ashtray, pull it out.Rear: To use the ashtray, raise the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, push it backin completely.

Front—To remove the ashtray, press downon the lock spring plate and pull out.

Rear—To remove the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

Instrument panel

Rear console box

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

Power outlets (12 VDC)


315


� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

Power outlet (115 VAC)


316


NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet, or allowingany liquid to get into the outlet maycause electrical failure or short cir-cuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode–ray tube type televisions,compressor–driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer–controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglobe box is open.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box


317


The box is designed to store a garagedoor opener transmitter.

Open the cover and remove the Velcroloop.

Remove the paper strip covering the adhe-sive on back side of square and adherethe square to back side of the transmitternear the center.

Please note if transmitter has wire clip forsun visor, this clip must be removed priorto adhesion of the Velcro.

Garage door opener box


318


Place the transmitter with Velcro squarefacing inside of box into the box. Makesure the transmitter button is locatedabove button pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel.Place the largest spacer on the pin thatwould be below transmitter button whenthe cover is closed. Close the cover.

When the garage door opener transmitteris properly installed, you can operate thetransmitter by pushing the center panel ofthe cover.


319


If the center panel does not contact yourgarage door opener transmitter:

� Check to see if spacer is on the cor-rect pin.

� Attach another spacer to the top oforiginal spacer. Check operation. If re-quired, continue to add spacers untilcontact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driv-ing, fill in a piece of felt or pad to preventthe transmitter from clattering.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the garage dooropener box closed while driving.

� Keep the remaining spacers awayfrom children.

To use the auxiliary bo xes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Type A and B—As these holder aredesigned for holding a light objectsuch as an eyeglass, do not placeany heavy objects in them. Heavyobjects may cause the holder toopen and the contents to fly outresulting in injuries.

NOTICE

Type A and B—During hot weather,the interior of the vehicle becomesvery hot. Do not leave anything flam-mable or deformable such as a light-er, glasses, etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes—


320


Type A (over head console with electricmoon roof)

Type B (over head console without elec-tric moon roof)

Type C (rear side trim)

Type D (rear right side panel—withoutrear air conditioning system)

Type E (rear left side panel)


321


The auxiliary box type E is equippedwith a strap to hold the third seat cen-ter head restraint.

Store the head restraint in the auxiliarybox when it is not is use. Storing proce-dures are as follows:

1. Store the removed head restraint, withits legs in the hole, in the auxiliarybox.

2. Attach the straps.

Make sure the head restraint is securelyheld in place.


322


To release the straps, push on both sidesof the buckle and pull apart.

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-sole box lid while pushing the lock re-lease button.

Rear console box


323


CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull upthe console box lid while pushing thelock release button.

CAUTION


The note pad holder is designed tohold small paper such as note pads.

To use the holder, raise the console boxupper lid while pushing the lock releasebutton.

CAUTION

� Do not write on the note pad holderwhile the vehicle is moving.

� Do not place anything else on thenote pad holder. Such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly cause injury duringsudden braking or an accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the consolebox upper lid closed when it is notin use.

Note pad holder


324


The rear console box is equipped witha coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the console box upper lid whilepushing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder


325


The coin holder can be set in the con-sole box.

To set the coin holder in the console box,raise the console box lid by pulling up thelock release lever.

The rear console box is equipped withcompact disc and cassette tape holder.

To use the holder, raise the console boxlid by pulling up the lock release lever.

The compact disc and cassette tape hold-er is detachable.

Compact disc and cassettetape holder


326


UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, pull up thelock release lever and raise the consolebox lid.

Removable console box (withseparate type second seat)


327


CONSOLE BOX

To access the console box:

1. Pull up the lock release lever andraise the console box lid.

2. Raise the upper tray.

CAUTION


REMOVING AND INSTALLING THECONSOLE BOX

The console box can be removed asfollows:

To remove the console box:Pull up the lock release lever to disen-gage the rear lock. Then lift the con-sole box and release the front hook.


328


To install the console box:

1. Install the front hook in the frontstriker of the console box under–tray.

2. Rotate down straight and push downto engage the rear lock.

CAUTION

� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the console box.

� Make sure the console box is se-curely locked by pushing forward,rearward, upward and sideways.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink–cans securely. To usethem, observe the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink–cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or in an accident.

� Type A only—to reduce the chanceof injury in case of an accident ora sudden stop while driving, keepthe cup holder closed when it isnot in use.

NOTICE

Type A only—As this holder is de-signed for holding soft cups only, donot place too heavy a cup, drink–canor bottle in it.

Cup holders


329


Type A (instrument panel)

Type B (front side of rear console box)

Type C (rear side of rear console box)

Type D (rear side trim)

To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown above.


CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie–down hooks folded in place on thefloor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors insteadof the tie–down hooks.

Tie–down hooks


330


These hooks are designed to hangthings like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging heavy loads on it.

These hooks are designed to hang car-go net.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, thesehooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging things other than a cargo neton it.

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails (1) attached to the roof andsliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, dothis.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise toloosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desiredposition for loading the luggages ofvarious sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten thecross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

Grocery bag hooks Cargo net hooks Roof luggage carrier


331


CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

� Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

� If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweights” on page 454 in Section 8for information on your vehicleoverall length and width.)

� Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

� If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

� Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have ahole, then it is designed for use with alocking clip. Fix the floor mat with lockingclip into the hole in the floor carpet.

Floor mat


332


CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.


333


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaOff–road vehicle precautions 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break–in period 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three–way catalytic converters 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium–tipped spark plugs 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


334


This vehicle belongs to the ut ility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity tomake it capable of performing in a widevariety of off–road applications. Specificdesign characteristics give it a highercenter of gravity than ordinary passen-ger cars. This vehicle design featurecauses this type of vehicle to be morelikely to rollover. And, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. An advan-tage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems. It is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as ordinary passenger cars anymore than low–slung sports cars de-signed to perform satisfactorily underoff–road conditions. Therefore, sharpturns at excessive speeds may causerollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

Off–road vehicle precautions


335


� Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow you tohave better control.

� When driving off–road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

� Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight up orstraight down is preferred. Your ve-hicle (or any similar off–road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak–in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first3200km (2000 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix–ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5–M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

Break–in period Fuel


336


OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build–up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.


337


GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems occur ( poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries


338


The three–way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three–way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three–way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push–start or pull–start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three–way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check–up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree–way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three–way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Three–way catalytic converters


339


CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the back door and back win-dow closed while driving. An openor unsealed back door and backwindow, may cause exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door and backwindow closed. Have the cause im-mediately located and corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oilconsumption


340


� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high–speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 424 in Section 7–2.


341


Your engine is fitted with iridium–tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium–tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drive-ability.

The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub–systems. If either sub–system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower–assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

Iridium–tipped spark plugs Brake system


342


ANTI–LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with “ABS” warning light)

The anti–lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock–up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti–lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti–lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti–lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti–lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti–lock brake system is in theself–check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

When the anti–lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti–lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti–lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti–lockbrake system: Although the anti–lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti–lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti–lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti–lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti–lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.


343


� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti–lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system, the brake assistsystem and the traction control systemand/or the vehicle stability control systemdo/does not operate, but the brake systemstill operates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.


344


If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

DRUM–IN–DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding–down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding–down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 162 in Sec-tion 1–6.


345


The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

Brake pad wear limitindicators

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identification number


346


The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics resulting in loss of control.

—Engine numberTheft prevention labels (exceptfor Canada) Suspension and chassis


347


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size— For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 349.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 348.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “—Uniform tirequality grading” on page 350.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 432.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber–coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias–ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias–ply tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols


348


7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 432.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 458.

10.Summer tire or all seasontire— An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 358.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


349


This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


350


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear— The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1–1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading


351


Temperature A, B, C— The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


352


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory–installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


353



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two


354



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


355


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below.Total load capacity:

567 kg (1250 lb.)Total load capacity means com-bined weight of occupants, cargoand luggage. Tongue load is in-cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:Vehicles with bench type secondseats:

Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)Vehicles with separate type secondseats:

Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)Seating capacity means the maxi-mum number of occupants whoseestimated average weight is 68 kg(150 lb.) per person. Depending onthe weight of each person, the seat-ing capacity given may exceed thetotal load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupantsare within the seating capacity,do not exceed the total load ca-pacity.

Towing capacity:Two–wheel drive models

2948 kg (6500 lb.)Four–wheel drive models

2812 kg (6200 lb.)Towing capacity means the maxi-mum gross trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo weight) thatyour vehicle is able to tow.

Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits


356


When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and l uggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)STEPS FOR DETERMININGCORRECT LOAD LIMIT1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution


357


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the available car-go and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 368.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLEIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 567 kg (1250 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:567 kg – 166 kg = 401 kg.(1250 lb. – 366 lb. = 884 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

401 kg – 176 kg = 225 kg.(884 lb. – 388 lb. = 496 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 355.


358


CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Cargocapacity

Weight of theremoved third seat

SEATING CONFIGURATIONVARIATIONIn case of removing the rear seats,it is possible to load as much cargoas the weight of the removed seats.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants) +(Weight of the removed rear seats)Rear seats weights:

Right side 24 kg (53 lb.)Left side 24 kg (53 lb.)

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high–speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow–covered or icy roads.For driving on snow–covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

Types of tires


359


All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 347.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originals.


360



361


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off–road driving precautions 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 378. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


362


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”position and release it, the cranking holdfunction continues to crank the engine in“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engineafter about 25 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,the function will keep cranking for about30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine——Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking


363


Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair–fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,turn the ignition key to “START” position,then release it.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page382 in Section 4.

NOTICE

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp–edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engineTips for driving in variousconditions


364


� Four–wheel drive models only—Toyotarecommends not using four–wheel driveon dry hard–surfaced roads, becausefour–wheel driving will cause unneces-sary noise and wear, and poor fueleconomy.

� Four–wheel drive models only—In coldtemperatures, noise may occur whendriving in two–wheel drive before thetransfer is warmed up. Therefore, firstdrive in four–wheel drive until thetransfer is warmed up.

� Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: When driving on a bumpyroad, set the vehicle height to “HI” inautomatic control mode, then selectmanual control mode by pushing themode select switch. You should driveat a speed of less than 30 km/h (18mph).

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high–speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high–speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.


365


� Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: If you drive throughwater, set the vehicle height to “HI”with the height select switch andthen change to manual controlmode by pushing the mode selectswitch. Do not exceed 30 km/h (18mph) or “HI” mode will automatical-ly change to “N” mode. Do notdrive through water deeper thanabout 700 mm (28 in.) even if thevehicle height is in “HI” mode.

When driving your vehicle off–road, pleaseobserve the following precautions to en-sure your driving enjoyment and to helpprevent the closure of areas to off–roadvehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas whereoff–road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-tions are wet, driving techniques shouldbe changed or travel delayed to pre-vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off–road, consultthe following organizations.

� State and Local Parks and RecreationDepartments

� State Motor Vehicle Bureau

� Recreational Vehicle Clubs

� U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� Drive carefully when off the road.Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

� Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off–road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep both handsand especially your thumbs on theoutside of the rim.

� Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

Off–road driving precautions


366


� After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clear offany such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� When driving off–road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

NOTICE

� If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.

� Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to theengine or other components doesnot occur.

Water entering the engine air intakewill cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the differentials, transmissionand transfer case, reducing the gearoil’s lubricating qualities.

� Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

� Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off–roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.


367


Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite,and non–borate coolant with long–lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long–life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 426 in Section 7–2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about –35�C(–31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about –42�C(–44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7–3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 424 in Section 7–2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the front wheels. Do notuse the parking brake, or snow or wateraccumulated in and around the parkingbrake mechanism may freeze, making ithard to release.

Winter driving tips


368


Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger–and–load–carrying vehicle.Towing a trailer will have an adverseeffect on handling, performance, braking,durability and driving economy (fuelconsumption, etc.). Your safety andsatisfaction depend on the proper use ofcorrect equipment and cautious drivinghabits. For your safety and the safety ofothers, you must not overload yourvehicle or trailer. Ask your local Toyotadealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension system: When disconnect-ing a trailer, set the vehicle height to“LO” in automatic control mode, thenselect manual control mode by push-ing the mode select switch. Other-wise, the vehicle height may changebecause of the automatic levelingfunction, resulting in an accident. Fordetails, see “Rear height control airsuspension” on page 189 in Section1–7.

Dinghy towing Trailer towing


369


WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed the following.

Two–wheel drive models2948 kg (6500 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models2812 kg (6200 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it isnecessary to use a sway controldevice with sufficient capacity. Thecombination of the gross trailerweight added to the total weight ofthe vehicle, occupants and vehiclecargo must never exceed a total of5352 kg. (11800 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight ofthe trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-hicle and trailer combination, cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer–hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.


370


� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross vehi-cle weight is the sum of weights ofthe unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

� 100 =9 to 11%

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight

CAUTION

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumload of the following. Never loadthe trailer with more weight in theback than in the front. About 60%of the trailer load should be in thefront half of the trailer and the re-maining 40% in the rear.

Weight carrying hitch or distribut-ing hitch

Two–wheel drive models295 kg (650 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models281 kg (620 lb.)


371


HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle–mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating2 Ball diameter3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter


372


TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball sizefor the trailer coupler. Most couplersare stamped with the required trailerball size. The sizes you will most likelyfind stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball tomatch or exceed the gross trailerweight rating of the trailer. The trailerball load rating should be printed onthe top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, thethreaded ball shank must protrude be-yond the bottom of the lock washerand nut at least 2 threads. The trailerball shank must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachmentspecified for the Toyota Sequoia.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TOTRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailerball setup on must be the proper heightfor the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.


373


CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired .

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness .

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWINGBRAKE CONTROLLER (with towingpackage)

Your vehicle is equipped with a serviceconnector for the towing brake controlleras shown. Link the connector to the tow-ing brake controller via the sub wire har-ness stored in the glove box. The detailedexplanation of the sub wire harness circuitis packed together with the sub wire har-ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con-troller where it does not prevent the driverfrom operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-ness be stored in the glove box when itis not in use.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 429 in Sec-tion 7–2 and page 458 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.


374


4–pin connector

7–pin connector

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Your vehicle is equipped with a wireharness stored in the rear end underbody. Some models are fitted with asocket for trailer lights under the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

7–pin connector (with towing pack-age)—This can be also connected tothe trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

NOTICE

Do not tow a trailer with (1) total taillight electric power consumption ofover 93 W or (2) total turn and stoplight electric power consumption ofover 54 W.

Ex. (1) Tail lights → under 9.3 W(SAE J573 No.69) � 10bulbs

(2) Turn/stop lights → under 27W (SAE J573 No.1157) � 4bulbs (left 2, right 2)

BREAK–IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first3200 km (2000 miles) of driving.


375


MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models withrear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:

1. Set the vehicle height to “N” (normal)in automatic control mode. Turn theignition switch off or select manualcontrol mode by pushing the mode se-lect switch to turn off the automaticleveling function.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or selectautomatic control mode by pushing themode select switch to turn on the auto-matic leveling function.

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (modelswith rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:

1. Set the vehicle height to “LO” in auto-matic control mode. (Make sure the“LO” indicator comes on.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or selectmanual control mode by pushing themode select switch to turn off the auto-matic leveling function.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer onthe ground and raise the hitch by 100mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or selectautomatic control mode by pushing themode select switch to turn on the auto-matic leveling function.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until therear vehicle height is lowered by theautomatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. Ifnot, raise the hitch higher and repeatsteps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in “LO” modewhere the hitch does not touch any-thing in “N” mode.

8. Set the vehicle height to “N” in auto-matic control mode.

PRE–TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose–up or nose–downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.


376


TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle–trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle–trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle–to–vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room befo-re changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use overdrive.


377


� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 386 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,start the engine. Be sure to keep thebrake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle–trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.


378


Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page429 in Section 7–2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Keep the automatic transmissionoverdrive turned on when enginebraking is not required. Driving withthe overdrive off will reduce the fueleconomy. (For details, see “Automatictransmission” on page 173 in Section1–7.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over–rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop–and–go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned–up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


379


CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.


380



381


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 402. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4


382


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”on page 362 in Section 3 and that youhave sufficient fuel. Also, check whetherthe other keys will start the engine. Ifthey work, your key may be broken. Havethe key checked at your Toyota dealer. Ifnone of your keys work, there may be amalfunction in the immobilizer system. Callyour Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page14 in Section 1–2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for furtherinstructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull– or push–start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three–way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” for further instructions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to“START” with the accelerator pedal fullydepressed, and hold the key at this posi-tion for about 30 seconds. Then thecranking hold function stops cranking au-tomatically, and you can try starting theengine with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a fewminutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine


383


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting


384


Discharged battery

Boosterbattery

Positiveterminal(“+” mark) Jumper

cablePositive terminal(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

Boosterbattery

Negative terminal (“–” mark)

Dischargedbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.


385


5. Charge the discharged battery with thejumper cables connected for approxi-mately 5 minutes. At this time, run theengine in the vehicle with the boosterbattery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at any authorized Toyota dealer orrepairer, or another duly qualified andequipped professional.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 382 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If your engine stalls whiledriving


386


If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Visually check to see if the enginedrive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or thecoolant is leaking, stop the engine im-mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. andthere are no obvious leaks, you mayhelp the engine cool down more quicklyby running it at about 1500 rpm for afew minutes with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,add coolant to the reservoir while theengine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 427 in Section 7–2.

If you cannot incr ease enginespeed If your vehicle overheats


387


CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of personal injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

If you have a flat tire—


388


� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

NOTICE

� Do not continue driving witha deflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

� Vehicles with rear height con-trol air suspension system:When jacking up or insta llingtire chains, be sure to setmanual control mode bypushing the mode selectswitch and stop the engine.Otherwise, the vehicle heightmay change because of theautomatic leveling function,resulting in an accident.

1. Get the required tools under theright side second seat andspare tire.1. Tool bag2. Jack

To get the tools, you need to fold upthe right side second seat. As for theoperation of folding up the seat, see“—Tumbling second seats for luggagespace” on page 52 in Section 1–3.To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

—Required tools and sparetire


389


Turn the jack joint by hand.To remove: Turn the joint in direction1 until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2until the jack is firmly secured to pre-vent it flying forward during a collisionor sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:1. Put a jack handle and jack handle

extension together as shown inthe illustration.1 Jack handle extension2 Jack handle

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely.Otherwise, the extension maycome off and it may damagethe paint or vehicle body.

2. Insert the end of the jack handleextension into the lowering screwand turn it counterclockwise withthe handle, making sure the han-dle remains firmly fitted onto thejack handle extension.

3. After the tire is lowered completelyto the ground, remove the holdingbracket.


390


When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire, takingcare that the tire goes straight upwithout catching on any other part, toprevent it from flying forward duringa collision or sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

Type A

Type B

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament


391


3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.Type A only—To protect the wheelsurface, place sufficient paper or clothbetween the wheel and wrench.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one–half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

—Loosening wheel nuts


392


Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side railRear—Under the rear axle hous-ing

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten-sion and jack handle end together asshown in the illustration.1 Jack handle end2 Jack handle extension3 Jack handle

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely.Otherwise, the extension maycome off and it may damagethe paint or vehicle body.

6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle


393


To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle extension in to the jack (it isa loose fit) and turn it clockwise withthe handle, making sure the handleremains firmly fitted onto the jackhandle extension. As the jack touchesthe vehicle and begins to fit, double–check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone. 7. Remove the wheel nuts and

change tires.Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal–to–met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

—Changing wheels


394


8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire back and see if you can tightenthem more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension coun-terclockwise with handle to lower thevehicle, making sure the handle re-mains firmly fitted onto the jack han-dle extension.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle


395


Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 110 N·m(11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

Type A

Type B

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.Put the wheel ornament into positionand then tap it firmly with the side orheel of your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament


396


11.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 458 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.12.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.With a spare tire of the same wheeltype as the installed tires—As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 458 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire.

With a spare tire of different wheeltype from the installed tires—As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 458 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tiresor wheels. See “Tire pressurewarning system” on page 198 inSection 1–7.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Two–wheel drive models—Turn off thetraction control system to become un-stuck to allow the tires to spin enoughto remove the vehicle from the obstruc-tion. (For details, see “Traction controlsystem” on page 182 in Section 1–7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

—After changing wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck


397


NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear



If your vehicle needs to betowed—


398


If towing is necessary, we recom-mended you have it done by yourToyota dealer or a commercial towtruck service. In consultation with them,have your vehicle towed using either (a)or (b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 399 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension system: When your ve-hicle is towed, set the vehicle heightto “N” in automatic control mode,then select manual control mode bypushing the mode select switch.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automatic lev-eling function, resulting in an acci-dent. For details, see “Rear heightcontrol air suspension” on page 189in Section 1–7.

Two–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear—

Place the ignition key in the “ACC” posi-tion.

NOTICE

� When lifting wheels, take care toensure adequate ground clearancefor towing at the opposite end ofthe raised vehicle. Otherwise, thebumper and/or underbody of thetowed vehicle will be damaged dur-ing towing.

� Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position, as thesteering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight while towing.


399



Four–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear—

We recommend using a towing dolly underthe front wheels. If you do not use atowing dolly, place the ignition key in the“ACC” position, put the transmission inneutral and the transfer in “2WD” mode.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when towingfrom the rear without a towing dolly.The steering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight.


(c) Towing with sling type truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to the emergency towing hookunder the front of the vehicle. Use ex-treme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing hook;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

—Emergency towing


400


A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard–surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing thevehicle. Avoid sudden starts or errat-ic driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on the emer-gency towing hook and towing cableor chain. The hook and towing cableor chain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing hook provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake,put the transmission in “N” and as to thefour–wheel drive models, moreover, setthe transfer in “2WD” mode. The key mustbe in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (enginerunning).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

� Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged andthat the installation bolts are not loose.

� Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the hook.

� Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

� To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

—Emergency towing hookprecautions


401


CAUTION

If the emergency towing hook is usedto get out when your vehicle becomesstuck in mud, sand or other conditionfrom which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power, makesure to observe the precautions men-tioned below. Otherwise, excessivestress will be put on the hook andthe towing cable or chain may break,causing serious injury or damage.

� If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

� Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

� Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

The following methods are effective toget out when your vehicle is stuck inmud, sand or other condition fromwhich the vehicle cannot be driven outunder its own power. Use extreme cau-tion when towing vehicles. In addition,keep away from the vehicles and towingcable or chain when towing.

� Remove the soil and sand in the frontand the back of the tires.

� Place a stone or wood under the tires.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 14 in Section 1–2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

—Tips for towing a stuckvehicle If you lose your keys


402


Please contact your nearest Toyotadealer and you can purchase a newwireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


403


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


404


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long–term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard–to–reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea–coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 405 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


405


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full–sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand–washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high–pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


406


Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car–cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re–painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.


407


CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side and curtain shieldairbags from activating correctly, re-sulting in serious injury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt does not come off,repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-ing–type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam–type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Cleaning the interior


408


Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

� When cleaning the inside of theback window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

� When cleaning the inside of therear quarter window, be careful notto scratch or damage the printedantenna.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.


409


� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm .

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.


410



411


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 416. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


412


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day–to–day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble–free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day–to–day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non–Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well–trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in–dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do–it–yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 417 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements


413


If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do–it–your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 444 in Section 7–3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the see–throughreservoir when the engine is cold. Seepage 426 in Section 7–2 for additionalinformation.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 427 inSection 7–2 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 440 in Section 7–3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 428 in Section 7–2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 424 in Section7–2 for additional information.

General maintenance


414


Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 428 in Section 7–2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 339 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operatesmoothly and that all latches lock securelyin any position. Check that the head re-straint move up and down smoothly andthat the locks hold securely in any latchedposition. For folding–down rear seatbacks,swing–up rear seat cushions and detach-able temporary third seat, check that thelatches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicleis held securely with the selector lever in“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back dooroperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.


415


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 429 in Section 7–2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page432 in Section 7–2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 434 in Section 7–2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip–offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat–looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

� Engine continually runs hot; oil pres-sure gauge stays low

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


416


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On–Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re–testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


417


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do–it–yourself service precautions 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 1


418


1. Windshield and back window washerfluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse blocks

7. Battery

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

Engine compartment overview


419


Spare fuses

Fuse locations


420


If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do–it–yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 421 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Do–it–yourself serviceprecautions


421


NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non–s ilicate,non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–bo-rate coolant with long–life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium–tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do–it–yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 425 in Section 7–2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non–silicate, non–amine, non–ni-trite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Parts and tools


422


Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as origi-nal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 444 inSection 7–3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver


423


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 2


424


Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

Low level

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand–tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


425


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE10W–30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W–30 atthe next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark


426


Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel–saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see–through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.If the level is low, add the coolant. (Forthe coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “L” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Checking the engine coolantlevel


427


Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite,and non–borate coolant with long–lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long–life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about –35�C(–31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about –42�C(–44�F).

NOTICE


Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long–life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking the radiator andcondenser


428


To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see–through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to washit off with water to prevent it fromdamaging the parts or paint.

If hot O.K.

If hot add If cold add

If cold O.K.

OpenClose

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON �II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Checking brake fluid Checking power steering fluid


429


Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 454 and 458. Therecommended cold tire inflation pres-sures and tire sizes are also de-scribed on the tire information label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

Checking tire inflationpressure


430


The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure s hould be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� If you cannot adjust the tirepressure when the tires arecold, add 20 to 30 kPa more tothe front tires and rear tires thanthe cold tire pressure, but neverexceed the maximum cold tirepressure molded on the tire side-wall.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.


431


5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure ( underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards


432


Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “ ∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built–intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep e nough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be repl aced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

Checking and replacing tires


433


REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on four–wheel drivemodels, all the tires must be thesame brand and have the sametread patterns.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.

For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 347 and 345.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias–ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

For vehicles with vehicle stabilitycontrol system—� Do not use tires of different

brands, sizes and construc-tions. This may damage thedrive system and prevent thevehicle skid control systemfrom functioning correctly.


434


Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page387 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be repl acedwith a new one.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 198 in Section 1–7.

With a spare tire of the samewheel type as the installed tires

With a spare tire of differentwheel type from the installedtires

Rotating tires


435


To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page387 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out–of–balance wheels, or severe braking.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 198 in Section 1–7.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on four–wheel drive models, allthe tires must be the same brand andhave the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires andchains


436


TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the front tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels


437


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 198in Section 1–6.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions


438



439


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 3


440


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Groundcable

Terminals

Hold–downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold–down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold–down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior


441


NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“–” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

Type A

Green

Type B

Clear orlight yellow

WhiteBlue Red

Dark

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions


442


NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type C

Checking and replacing fuses


443


If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 419 in Sec-tion 7–1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 459 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type C fuses—When any of the fuses areblown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull–out tool. The location of the pull–out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “DOME”or “RAD NO.1” fuse, which may be dis-pensable for normal driving, and use it ifits amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If a new fuse immediately blows out, thereis a problem with the electrical system.Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.


444


If any washer does not work or the lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—


445


Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights — 60/55 A

Front fog lights 9006 51 B

Parking lights 168 5 C

Front side markerand front turnsignal lights

3157A

27/8 D

Rear turn signallights

7440 21 D

Stop/tail and rearside marker lights

7443 21/5 C

Back–up lights 921 18 C

Tail lights 194 3.8 C

License plate lights 168 5 C

High mountedstoplight

175 8 C

Interior lights — 8 E

Personal lights — 3.8 C

Glove box light — 1.2 C

Luggagecompartment light

— 8 E

Vanity lights — 3 C

Door courtesylights

194 3.8 C

A: HB2 halogen bulbs B: HB4 halogen bulbsC: Wedge base bulbs (clear)D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Double end bulbs

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connec-tor. Remove the rubber cover.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

—Headlights


446


2. Release the bulb retaining springand remove the bulb. Install a newbulb and the bulb retaining spring.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of thebulb with the cutouts of the mountinghole.

3. Install the rubber cover and fit itsecurely on the boss. Then, plug inthe connector.

Make sure the rubber cover fits securelyon the bulb base and the mounting body.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

If either the left or right front fog lightsburns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front foglight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

—Front fog lights


447


1. LEFT–HAND PARKING LIGHT: Foreasy access to the parking light, re-move the engine coolant reservoir.

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver. Removeand install the clip as shown in the fol-lowing illustrations.

—Parking lights—Front side marker and frontturn signal lights


448


Removing clip

Installing clip

—Rear turn signal andstop/tail, rear side markerlights


449


a: Stop/tail and rear side marker lightb: Rear turn signal light

Use a flat–bladed screwdriver. To protectthe paint, place several sheets of paperover the paintwork.

—Tail and back–up lights


450


Unplug the connector while depressingthe lock release.

a: Tail lightb: Back–up light

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

—License plate lights


451


Use a Phillips–head and a flat–bladedscrewdrivers. To protect the paint, placeseveral sheets of paper over the paint-work.

—High mounted stoplight


452



453


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 454. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 459. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8


454


∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With P245/70R16 tires and without

roof rails∗3: With P265/70R16 or P265/65R17 tires

and without roof rails∗4: With P245/70R16 tires and with roof

rails∗5: With P265/70R16 or P265/65R17 tires

and with roof rails∗6: Installing accessories in addition to

those installed at the factory increasesthe weight of the vehicle, thereby re-ducing vehicle capacity weight. Con-tact your Toyota dealer about theweight of accessory parts.

Dimensions and weights

1860 (73.2)∗2

1870 (73.6)∗3

1915 (75.4)∗4

1925 (75.8)∗5

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.)Two–wheel drive models


Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight∗6 (occupants � luggage) kg (lb.)

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

5180 (203.9)

2005 (78.9)

1880 (74.0)∗3

1935 (76.2)∗5

3000 (118.1)

1675 (65.9)

1710 (67.3)

567 (1250)

2948 (6500)

2812 (6200)




455


Model:2UZ–FE

Type:8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):94.0 � 84.0 (3.70 � 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):4664 (284.5)

Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):100 (26.4, 22.0)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill),L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Engine Fuel Service specifications


456


Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):With rear heater 14.5 (15.3, 12.8)Without rear heater 12.8 (13.5, 11.3)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non–silicate, non–amine,non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant withlong–life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long–life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringoptimum transmission performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” may cause deterioration in shiftquality, locking up of your transmissionaccompanied by vibration, and ultimate-ly damage the automatic transmissionof your vehicle.



457


TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 75W–90

DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two–wheel drive models3.9 (4.1, 3.4)

Four–wheel drive modelsFront 1.15 (1.2, 1.0)Rear 3.75 (4.0, 3.3)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:

FrontSAE 75W–90

RearSynthetic oil SAE 75W–140

CHASSIS LUBRICATION (four–wheel drive models)

Propeller shafts:Spiders

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2

Slide yokesLithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2 or Molybdenum–disulfide lithiumbase chassis grease, NLGI No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine stopping and after de-pressing the brake pedal several times,mm (in.):

113 (4.5)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 300 N (31 kgf, 67 lbf):

6—9 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III


458


Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire sizeTire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Wheel sizeTire sizeFront Rear Spare tire

Wheel size

P245/70R16 106S 220 (2.2, 32) 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 16 � 7J

P265/70R16 111S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 � 7J or 7JJ

P265/65R17 110S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 7 1/2JJ

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 429 through 437, in Section 7–2.

Wheel nut torque, N ⋅m (kgf ⋅m, ft ⋅lbf):110 (11.5, 83)

Tires


459


Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. AIR SUS No.2 10 A: Rear height con-trol air suspension system

2. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat audio system,rear seat entertainment system

3. A/F 20 A: A/F sensor

4. SECURITY 15 A: Multiplex communica-tion system

5. DEF I/UP 7.5 A: Rear window defog-ger, outside rear view mirror defoggers,multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system

Engine compartment

6. H–LP LL 10 A (with daytime runninglight system): Left–hand headlight (lowbeam)

7. H–LP RL 10 A (with daytime runninglight system): Right–hand headlight(low beam)

8. STA 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, electronic throttle control sys-tem

9. H–LP LH 10 A (with daytime runninglight system): Left–hand headlight(high beam)

Engine compartment

10. H–LP RH 10 A (with daytime runninglight system): Right–hand headlight(high beam)

11. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (taillights)

12. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer sub bat-tery

13. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-troller

14. CDS FAN 25 A: Electric cooling fan

15. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse



Fuses


460


Instrument panel

18. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, electronic throttle controlsystem

19. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, on–board diagnosis sys-tem

20. H–LP RH 15 A (without daytime run-ning light system): Right–hand head-light

21. TOWING 30 A: Trailer lights (stoplights, turn signal lights, tail lights)

22. ALT–S 7.5 A: Charging system

23. DRL 15 A (with daytime running lightsystem): Daytime running light system

H–LP LH 15 A (without daytime run-ning light system): Left–hand head-light

24. AM2 25 A: Starting system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, electronicthrottle control system, “IGN 1” and“IGN 2” fuses

25. TURN–HAZ 20 A: Turn signal lights,emergency flashers

26. RAD NO.3 30 A: Audio/video system

27. ST 30 A: Starting system, “STA” fuse

28. HORN 10 A: Horns

29. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

30. DOME 10 A: Center interior and per-sonal lights, personal lights, luggagecompartment light, air conditioning sys-tem, wireless remote control system,garage door opener, ignition switchlight, door courtesy lights, foot light,vanity lights, gauges and meters

31. ECU–B 7.5 A: Multiplex communicationsystem (power door lock system, secu-rity system, auto–door locking system,automatic light control system, head-light delay off system, tail light autocut system, illuminated entry system,daytime running light system), backdoor lock system, driver and front pas-senger door lock system, gauges andmeters

32. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mir-ror heaters

33. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system, rearseat entertainment system

34. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, back door cour-tesy light, license plate lights

35. ECU–IG 10 A: Charging system, anti–lock brake system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, traction control system(two–wheel drive models), active trac-tion control system (four–wheel drivemodels), electric moon roof, back doorlock system, driver and front passengerdoor lock system, gauges and meters,multi–information display, auto anti–glare inside rear view mirror, poweroutlets, multiplex communication sys-tem

36. WSH 25 A: Wipers and washer

37. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets


461


38. IGN 2 20 A: Starting system

39. PWR NO.3 20 A: Rear passenger’spower window (right side)

40. PWR NO.4 20 A: Rear passenger’spower window (left side)

41. CIG 15 A: Air conditioning systems,power rear view mirror control, ciga-rette lighter

42. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Audio/video system,power outlets, multiplex communicationsystem (power door lock system, secu-rity system, auto–door locking system,automatic light control system, head-light delay off system, tail light autocut system, illuminated entry system,daytime running light system)

43. 4WD 20 A: A.D.D. control system,four–wheel drive system

44. STOP 15 A: Stoplights, high–mountedstoplights, multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, vehicle stability control system,traction control system (two–wheeldrive models), active traction controlsystem (four–wheel drive models), mul-tiplex communication system

45. OBD 7.5 A: On–board diagnosis sys-tem

46. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights,glove box light, seat heaters, cigarettelighter, ashtrays, multi–information dis-play, audio/video system, gauge andmeters, air conditioning systems

47. PWR NO.1 25 A: Driver’s door locksystem

48. WIP 25 A: Wiper and washers

49. IGN 1 10 A: Charging system

50. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof

51. PWR NO.2 25 A: Front passengers’door lock system

52. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning systems,electric cooling fan, back window de-fogger, outside rear view mirror heater

53. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

54. GAUGE 15 A: Back–up lights, seatheaters, gauge and meters, air condi-tioning systems

55. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

56. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

Fuses (type B)

57. MAIN 40 A: Starting system, “H–LPRH”, “H–LP LH” and “STA” fuses

58. DOOR NO.2 30 A: Multiplex commu-nication system (power door lock sys-tem, security system, auto–door lockingsystem)

59. PWR SEAT 30 A: Power seats

60. AM1 40 A: “HTR”, “CIG”, “GAUGE”,“RAD NO.2”, “ECU–IG”, “WIP”, “WSH”and “4WD” fuses

61. PWR NO.5 30 A: Power door lock sys-tem, back door lock system

Fuses (type C)

62. RR HEATER 30 A: Rear air condition-ing system

63. DEFOG 40 A: Back window defogger

64. HEATER 50 A: Front air conditioningsystem

65. AIR SUS 50 A: Rear height control airsuspension system

66. TOWING R/B 60 A: Trailer brake con-troller, trailer lights (tail lights), trailersub battery


462


67. ALT 140 A: “AM1”, “PWR SEAT”,“TAIL”, “STOP”, “SUN ROOF”, “PANEL”,“OBD”, “FOG”, “PWR NO.1”, “PWRNO.2”, “PWR NO.5”, “PWR NO.3”,“PWR NO.4”, “AC INV”, “PWR OUT-LET” and “SEAT HTR” fuses

68. ABS 60 A: Anti–lock brake system,vehicle stability control system, tractioncontrol system (two–wheel drive mod-els), active traction control system(four–wheel drive models)

69. A/PUMP 50 A: Air injection system

70. R/B 30 A: “A/F” and “SECURITY”fuses


463


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9


464


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or366–0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

foreword - imageeventphotos.imageevent.com/allout/sequoia/ownerqus manual.pdf · your vehicle has...

Documents